A Publication of

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

HILVERSUM, THE NETHERLANDS
Order No :

3522 009 11349

Date

September 2007

Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

contained in this handbook is accurate and complete.
Should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any users
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, they are
invited to send the relevant details to:
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.
P.O. BOX 32
1200 JD HILVERSUM
THE NETHERLANDS

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is
prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner. All
brand names and product names in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

PREFACE
This manual is valid for the SOPHO 2000 IPS telephone system.
In this manual the term NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX PBX telephone system represents the
SOPHO 2000 IPS system.
This book might refer to products not included in the SOPHO portfolio.
Certain items in this manual do not apply to the European market.
In case of doubt, please contact your supplier.

LIST OF TERMS
Abbr. NEC Description
NEC
(Trunk) Route Restriction Class
AIMWorX
Authorization Code
Background music (feature)

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC
TRFC

Boss/Secretary dialing
Broker's call
Busy in/busy out - ACD
Class of Service
Coin lines
Consecutive Speed Dialing
Consultation hold
Development table
Dial conversion
Dynamic Dial Pad
Executive calling
Ground Start
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Home side trunk

User side
trunk

Legacy
Location number
Loop Start
Mate side trunk

Network
side trunk

MATWorX
Multi line terminal
Multiple Call Forwarding
My Line
Nailed down connection (data)
Night Connection - fixed
Night connection - fixed
Night Connection - flexible
Office Code

PLE

CLID

One touch key

OpenWorX
Operator
Party lines
Peer to peer
Pilot number
Preset dialing
Prime Line
Restriction Class
Route Advance
Route Pattern
Save and Repeat
Secondary appearance

ii

TRFC

LNR

Traffic Class
SMDR & CTI based management platform
PID code
When phone is idle, user can have
background music on speaker
Executive/Secretary
Shuttle : alternate between 2 parties
occupying one line
Group - Absent/Present switching
Facility Class Mark (sometimes traffic class)
Common number can be speed dial,
individual choice dialed manually
Enquiry
Analysis tree : table within numbering plan
Conversion from pulse to DTMF
Pressing numeric keys grabs a line as well.
VIP status assigned to a station.
Earth calling : analog trunk protocol
Voice volume control on terminals
For ISDN trunks
TDM based equipment (non IP)
Division based on capabilities or priorities in
the IP system
Subscriber signalling e.g. an ATU-SS
For ISDN trunks
Operational Maintenance interface tool
SOPHO Set / ErgoLine : digital terminal with
soft key assignment possible
Multi hop (maximum 5 hops allowed)
Users own station number.
Fixed connection between two data
adapters.
Permanent Line Extension
Permanent Line Extension
CF on night extension
Cluster Identity used for Open Numbering
Plans
Dterm keys, work (and programmed) like
speed dial function
CTI Application platform
PSTN operator / provider
Peer to peer : one to one relation on
functional level
Group number
En-block dialing : prepare number and send
it in one go (versus overlap dialing)
Seized line (trunk line or extension) when
going off-hook (or speaker)
Traffic Class
Alternative routing when trunk(s) busy
Tree : part of the number analysis table
Last Number Redial
park position / sub line

Abbr. NEC Description

NEC
Single line terminal
Software Line Appearance
Split Call Forwarding
Stack Dial
Stack Dial
Station
Station Class
Sub Line
Tenant
Trunk Route
Voice Call
Whisper page
Account Code (Client Billing Code)
Authorization Code Facility

AC
ACF
ADF
ALM DSPP (External) Alarm Display Panel
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
ANS
AOC
AP
AP
ATND
AttCon
BATTM
BGM
BHCA
BK
BSY
BT
CAMA
CAS
CAT
CCIS

CCT
CF-D

Answer
Advice of charge
Application Card
Analog Port
Attendant
Attendant console
Battery Module
Back Ground Music service
Busy Hour Call Attempts
Black
Busy
Busy Tone
Centralized Message Accounting
Centralized Attendant Service
Customer Administration terminal
Common Channel Interoffice
Signalling
Common Control Switching
arrangement
CCIS Trunk
Call Forwarding - Destination

CFT
CIC

Conference trunk
Circuit Identification Code

CID
CIR
CIS
CM
CNP
CO
COT
CPN
CPN
CPU
CRD
CS
CSU
DAT

Call ID Display
Caller ID Receiver
Call Information System
Command
Closed Numbering Plan
Central Office
Central Office Trunk
Calling Party Number
Calling Party Number
Central Processing Unit
Call Redirect
Cell Station

CCSA

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC

LNNR

Analog Phone
Virtual Extension
Separate CF for internal and external calls.
Last Number/Number Repetition
Outgoing calling list (5 entries)
Redial List : maximum 5 numbers

Extension /
DNR
FCM
Facility Class Mark
Lines on the stations, other then the prime
line
Analysis group : multi company on one PBX
Route

PID

Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.

Password integrated dialing
OAI related.
OAI related.
Caller subscriber number coming in with MF
signaling on T1 trunks

Operator console

A standard related to 911 service

Dterm used as programming device for PBX
Comparable to IMP
Customer specific leased lines/network, US
only
Call Forwarding Destination : no
preparation on originator necessary.
Trunk channel ID for virtual IP trunk
channels (Line number)

See Commands Manual

ISDN calling party number

Digital Announcement Trunk

iii

Abbr. NEC Description

NEC

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC

DBM
DCH
DD key
DDD
DDI
DDOVR
DeskCon
DID calls

D-Channel Handler
Do not Disturb Key
Direct Distance Dialing
Direct Digital interface
Do not Disturb Override
Desk Console
Direct Inward Dialing calls

DISA
DIT

Direct Inward System Access

DID trunk / Direct Inward Termination PLE

DLC
DM
DMS
DNIS
DOD

Digital Line Circuit

Distributed Module
Distributed Module Small
Dialed number Identification Service
Direct Outward Dialing
DDO

DP
DPC
DPC
DRS

(Rotary) Dial Pulse

Data Port Controller
Destination Point Code
Device Registration Server

DS
DSS/BLF

Differential Services (DiffServ)

Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp
Field
Device Server WorX
Dial Tone
Data Terminal Equipment
Digital (or IP) terminal
Digital Tone Generator
Digital Trunk Interface
Forced Account Code
Federal Communications
Commission
Floppy Disk
Forwarded - All calls
Forwarded - Busy
Forwarded - No answer
Frame Ground
Feature Group D format
Free Location Facility

DSW
DT
DTE
Dterm
DTG
DTI
FAC
FCC
FD
FDA
FDB
FDN
FG
FGD
FLF
FP
FX
HDT
HWT
ICH
ICI
ICM
IEC
ILC
IP
IPM
IPS
IPT
IPX
IVS
iv

Commands Manual - AP00 card

Firmware Processor
Foreign Exchange
Hold Tone
howler tone
ISDN channel handler
Incoming Call Identification
Intercom
International Electro-technical
Commission
ISDN line card
Internet Protocol
Indications per minute
Internet Protocol Server
IP trunk
Internet Protocol eXchange
Integrated Voice Server

T1/E1 interface to public network

SV
DDI

SuperVisor / Operator Console

Direct dialing in : not for FX and WATS
trunk (USA only)
Remote access to system
Permanent Line Extension(s) : for limited
direct inward dialing: 1/more trunk(s) related
to 1 station
For Dterm, Attendant and Desk Console.

Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls

without attendant assistance
Pulse dialing
Kind of Cluster ID; for terminating office
Compare with Gatekeeper function:
registering endpoints

For Dterm assistant software

Dterm

Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)

American regulation office

Signalling format for ANI.

OIA related, Desksharing look-a-like.
NOT available for IPS 2000
Compare with PMC
Specific part of PSTN; US only
Alarm tone

IP

Internet Protocol
For flashing lamps / LEDs

Abbr. NEC Description

NEC

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC

KF

Key Feauture (registration)

KTF
LAN
LCR

Key Transfer Facility

Local Area Network
Least Cost Routing

LAN
LCCR

LDN
LDT
LEN

Listed Directory Number

Loop Dial trunk
Line Equipment Number

EHWA

LT
MAT

Line/Trunk
Maintenance Administration Terminal OMM

MB

Make Busy

MCI
MEM
MFG
MFR
MIB
MIC
MIS
MJ
MLDT
MN
MOC
MP
MRF
MSF
MSG
NEAX
NS
NTF
NTS
OAI
ODT
ODT
ONP
OPC
OPR
PAD

Message Center Interface

Main Memory

SETOUT

MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender

management Information Base
Microphone
management Information System
Major (alarm)
Melody Trunk
Minor (alarm)

PBR
PBSND
PC
PCK
PFT
PIM

Main Processor
Mode Reset Facility
Mode Set Feature
Message
NEC PBX
Network Station
Number Transfer Facility
Night Transfer Station
Open Application Interface
OD Trunk
Outband Dialing Trunk
Open Numbering Plan
Origional Point Code
Operator
(IP) Packet Assembler /
Disassembler
Push Button Receiver
Push Button Sender
Point Code
Pickup
Power Failure Transfer
Port Interface Module

PLO
PMS

Phase Locked Oscillator

Property Management System

PN
PNA
PPS
PROTIMS
PRT
PS
PS
QoS

Part Number
Phone line Network Alliance
Pulses per second
ISDN primary rate interface trunk
Personal Station
Portable Station
Quality of Service

Key systems are operating directly on

outside lines.
OAI related.
Local Area Network
Least cost call routing : number analysis
development manner

Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~

7)+ Port nbr (00 ~ 63) LEN = (000 ~ 763)
Operation Maintenance module : PC
needed in terminals mode
Set to Out Of Service : Out of Service / Not
installed situation for reset or maintenance
Interface for Voice Mail system

Microphone or its key

OM terminal window, part of MATWorX

Compare with CPU
OAI related.
OAI related.
SOPHO
OAI related.
Night Extension
CTI interface
2/4 wire E&M

Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office

Attendant
Used for TDM / IP translation
DTMF receiver
DTMF sender

Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM

shelves
PMS

Property Management System (in hotel

environments)
For example PN-8DLCC board
Used in pulse dialing
Proprietary protocol, used for building CCIS

NEC wireless system

Abbr. NEC Description

NEC
RAS
RBT
RC
REN
RLS
ROT
RPIM
RSC
RST
RTP
SCF
SDT
SLT
SMDR
SMFN
SMFR
SOC
SP
SPID
SPN
SSFM
SSFR
SST
STA
STN
TAH
TAS
TCF
TCM
TDM
TDS
TDSW
TIC
TMF
TMSF
TNT
TRF
TSW
UAP
UCD
UNP
USOC
VC
VCT
VDSL
VM
VOIP
WAN
WATS
WCS
WH
WU
ZT

vi

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC

Registration Admission Status

Ringback Tone
Room Cutoff
Ring Equivalence Number
Release
Reorder Tone
Remote PIM
Route restriction Class
Restricted
Real Time Protocol
Switch Control Facility
Special Dial Tone
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
FDCR
Status Monitor Facility (Notification)
Status Monitor Facility (Request)
System on chip
Soft Phone
Service Profile ID (ISDN)
BSP-ID
Special Part Number
Service Set facility Monitor
Service Set Facility Request
Service Set Tone
Station
Station
Trunk Appearance Hold
Trunk Answer Any Station
Terminal Control Facility
(Deluxe) Travelling Class Mark
Time division multiplexing
Time division switching
Time Division Switch
(Individual) Trunk identification Code
Terminal Multi-information transfer
Facility
(Terminal) Mode Set Facility
Tone/Music source interface
Transfer
Time Switched
User Application Processor
Uniform Call Distribution
Uniform Numbering Plan
User Service Order Code
Voice Compression
Voice CODEC circuit card
Very high data rate Digital Subscriber
Line
Voice Mail
Voice over IP
VOIP
Wide Area Network
WAN
Wide Area Telephone Service
Wireless Communication System
White
Wake up
Zone Transceiver

Registration Admission Status

OAI related.
Analog telephone
Full Detailed Call Recording
OAI related.

Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)

OAI related.
OAI related.

Pickup incoming calls in night mode

OAI related.

Line numbers of trunk lines

OAI related.
OAI related.

Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on

longest idle.
(Network) numbering plan
Other word for REN

Voice over IP
Wide Area Network
Specific part of PSTN, US only
"Analog DECT"

For Wireless system

Dterm icon

Meaning
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Answer
Redial
Conf(erence)
Recall
Feature
MIC
Message
Directory
-/+
Help
Exit

vii

viii

NEAX 2000 IPS

ISDN System Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................
PURPOSE ....................................................................................................................
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ......................................................................................
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ...........................................................................................

1
1
1
2

PBX System Designation ...................................................................................................

Terminal Name ....................................................................................................................

2
2

REFERENCE MANUAL ...............................................................................................

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................................................

SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................

5
6

System Outline of ISDN-PRI ..............................................................................................

System Outline of ISDN-BRI ..............................................................................................
System Outline of ISDN-VPN .............................................................................................
System Outline of ISDN Terminal ......................................................................................
DTI ........................................................................................................................................
DCH ......................................................................................................................................
PRT .......................................................................................................................................
BRT ......................................................................................................................................
PLO ......................................................................................................................................
ICH ........................................................................................................................................
ILC ........................................................................................................................................

6
7
9
11
15
15
16
17
19
20
20

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS ............................................................................

21

Common Channel and Voice Channel Link Control ........................................................

Event Based CCIS Feature List .........................................................................................
Event Based CCIS Service Conditions .............................................................................

22
24
27

CARD NAME AND FUNCTION ...................................................................................

SYSTEM CAPACITY ...................................................................................................

28
30

System Capacity for ISDN-PRI ..........................................................................................

System Capacity for ISDN-BRI ..........................................................................................

30
31

SYSTEM CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................

33

Time Slot Assignment Condition ......................................................................................

Time Slot Allocation for DTI/PRT/DCH Card ....................................................................
Line Distance between PBX and NT1/ISDN Terminal ......................................................

33
34
35

DTI SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................

36

Transmission Characteristics ...........................................................................................

Frame Configuration of 24DTI ...........................................................................................
Frame Configuration of 30DTI ...........................................................................................

36
38
42

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98toc001.fm

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................

45
46

Static Electricity Guard ......................................................................................................

46

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................

49

ISDN-PRI Required Equipment ..........................................................................................

ISDN-BRI Required Equipment ..........................................................................................
ISDN Terminal Required Equipment .................................................................................
Event Based CCIS Required Equipment ..........................................................................

49
50
50
51

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI ..........................................................

52

Mounting DTI and DCH Card .............................................................................................

Mounting PRT Card ............................................................................................................
Mounting CONN Card .........................................................................................................
Selection of PLO in MP Card .............................................................................................
DTI/PRT Cable Connection via MDF .................................................................................
Cable Connection via CONN Card ....................................................................................

53
53
54
57
58
61

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI ..........................................................

63

Mounting BRT Card ............................................................................................................

BRT Cable Connection via MDF ........................................................................................

64
65

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL ..............................................

72

Mounting ICH Card .............................................................................................................

Mounting ILC Card ..............................................................................................................
ILC Cable Connection via MDF ..........................................................................................

73
74
75

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EVENT BASED CCIS .......................................

78

Mounting CCH Card ............................................................................................................

79

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING ................................................................

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................

81
82
83

System Data Backup ..........................................................................................................

Office Data Conversion ......................................................................................................
LEN Assignment by CM14 .................................................................................................
Trunk Number Assignment ................................................................................................
AP Number Assignment .....................................................................................................

83
84
85
88
88

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................

89

Digital Trunk Data Assignment ......................................................................................... 89

D Channel Handler Assignment ........................................................................................ 101

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................ 104

BRT Assignment ................................................................................................................. 104

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 114

CLI Transparency ............................................................................................................... 115
DID Addressing ................................................................................................................... 117

ii

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98toc001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MEGACOM Access ...........................................................................................................
SID to Network-Present ......................................................................................................
CPN to Network-Present ....................................................................................................
SID to Terminating User-Display .......................................................................................
CPN to Terminating User-Display .....................................................................................
Subaddress-Present ...........................................................................................................
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection ..............................................................................
ISDN PRI Call By Call Service Selection ...........................................................................
Advice of Charge-Display ..................................................................................................
Alternate Routing for ISDN ................................................................................................
Centrex SHF over ISDN ......................................................................................................
ETSI ISDN Overlap Sending ...............................................................................................
ETSI ISDN Overlap Receiving ............................................................................................
ETSI ISDN Addressing .......................................................................................................
ETSI ISDN Channel Negotiation ........................................................................................
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) /
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) ..........................................................
Malicious Call Trace ...........................................................................................................
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ...................................................................

121
122
122
128
131
133
134
135
141
143
144
145
148
153
156
157
159
160

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................... 162

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING ................................................................. 164
ILC Assignment ..................................................................................................................
ICH Assignment ..................................................................................................................
Point-to-Point Connection .................................................................................................
Point-to-Multipoint Connection .........................................................................................
Individual Terminal Call .....................................................................................................
Group Call ...........................................................................................................................

164
167
170
172
174
178

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING ..................................................................... 183

Programming Summary .....................................................................................................
Numbering Plan Programming ..........................................................................................
BRI Trunk Programming ....................................................................................................
Home-Side Trunk Programming ........................................................................................
Mate-Side Trunk Programming .........................................................................................
Incoming Termination for Event Based CCIS Calls .........................................................
Access Code/Terminating Number Assignment for Outgoing Event Based Calls .......
Release Timer for Virtual Tie Lines (Home-Side and Mate-Side Trunks) ......................
CCH Data Assignment ........................................................................................................
Tandem Connection Programming ...................................................................................
Closed Numbering Programming .....................................................................................
Event Based CCIS Trunk Data Table ................................................................................

iii

183
185
186
194
196
203
204
205
206
207
208
209

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98toc001.fm
JULY/01/2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION ................................................................... 211
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 212
MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS ........................................................... 213
Regular PIM ......................................................................................................................... 213
PIM for Backup CPU System ............................................................................................. 215

LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS ....................................................................... 217

PN-BRTA (BRT) ...................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTC (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTK (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) .............................................................................................................
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-24PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-DTA (PRT) ......................................................................................................................
PN-DTB (PRT) ......................................................................................................................
PN-SC00 (CCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DTA (CCH) .....................................................................................................................
PN-DTB (CCH) .....................................................................................................................
PN-SC01 (DCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-SC03-B (ICH) .................................................................................................................
PZ-M542 (CONN) .................................................................................................................
PZ-M557 (CONN) .................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCA (ILC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCC (ILC) ....................................................................................................................

218
223
228
233
241
248
254
262
269
276
283
286
292
298
301
303
305
307
310

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST ....................................................................................... 315

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST .............................................................. 316
PLO OPERATION TEST .............................................................................................. 324
Clock Signal Generation Test ............................................................................................ 324
Clock Signal Synchronization Test ................................................................................... 325
Interoffice Synchronization Test ....................................................................................... 328

iv

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98toc001.fm
JULY/13/2007

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE/OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual describes the hardware installation and the programming procedure for the Integrated Service
Digital Network (ISDN) on the NEAX 2000 IPS System.

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual consists of five chapters. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1 through 5.
CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the ISDN system outline, the equipment name and function,
system specifications, capacity and conditions.

CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the hardware installation procedure to provide ISDN interface
to the PBX.

CHAPTER 3

SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

This chapter explains the programming procedure to provide the ISDN feature to
the PBX.

CHAPTER 4

CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

This chapter explains the mounting location, the meaning of lamp indications, and
the switch settings of each ISDN circuit card.

CHAPTER 5

OPERATION TEST
This chapter explains the operation test to be performed after you completed the
installation of ISDN. For fault diagnosis by MAT or CAT, refer to the Maintenance
Manual.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch0001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

INTRODUCTION
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

PBX System Designation
PBX system is designated as PBX or system usually.
When we must draw a clear line between the PBX systems, they are designated as follows.
2000 IPS : NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER
IPSDMR : NEAX IPSDMR INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVERDMR
IPSDM : NEAX IPSDM INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVERDM

Terminal Name
The following IP terminals are designated as DtermIP usually, unless we need to mention the type of terminal in particular.
DtermIP (IP Adapter Type) [For North America Only]
DtermIP (IP Bundled Type)
DtermIP INASET
DtermSP20
DtermSP30
NOTE 1: Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i) terminal can be used as the IP terminal by attaching the
IP Adapter (IP Enabled Dterm). This terminal provides users with all features currently available in DtermIP.
NOTE 2: In regard to the China market, we have not released NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL
SERVER but NEAX 2000 is released.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch0001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the manuals below:
System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure and the programming procedure for
the NEAX 2000 IPS System.
Command Manual:
Contains the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command functions, setting data
required for programming the system and the Resident System Program.
Office Data Programming Manual:
Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the Office Data Programming Sheets.
Maintenance Manual:
Contains the maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.
Installation Procedure Manual:
Contains the installation procedure for the PBX system.
CCIS System Manual:
Contains the installation and the programming procedure for the CCIS system.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch0001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch0001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter explains the ISDN system outline, the equipment name and
function, system specifications, capacity and conditions.

SYSTEM OUTLINE ....................................................................

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS .........................................
CARD NAME AND FUNCTION .................................................
SYSTEM CAPACITY .................................................................
SYSTEM CONDITIONS .............................................................
DTI SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................

6
21
28
30
33
36

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SYSTEM OUTLINE
This system can be interfaced with an ISDN with the Primary Rate Interface or the Basic Rate Interface at
the reference point S/T and ISDN Terminal.

System Outline of ISDN-PRI

The system is configured with a 24/30-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) for digital network interface,
D Channel Handler (DCH) for receiving/transmitting D channel signaling data from/to the ISDN exchange. Since the Main Processor (MP) contains Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO), the system can be synchronized to the ISDN as a clock receiver office.
The figure below shows the system outline of ISDN-PRI.

System Outline of ISDN-PRI

PBX
SLT

1.5 M/2 M PCM

DIGITAL LINE (23B/30B + D)

23B/30B
LC

DTI
/PRT

NT1

ISDN

Dterm
DLC

CLOCK
SIGNAL

DCH

TDSW

DCH : D Channel Handler

DTI : Digital Trunk Interface
NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO : Phase Locked Oscillator
PRT : Primary Rate Interface Trunk

MP
(PLO)

NOTE 1: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

NOTE 2: The PRT provides a built-in DCH.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

System Outline of ISDN-BRI

The system is configured with a Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) for the digital network interface. Since
the MP contains PLO, the system can be synchronized to the ISDN as a clock receiver office.
The figure below shows the system outline of ISDN-BRI.

System Outline of ISDN-BRI

PBX
2-CHANNEL PCM
DIGITAL LINE (2B + D)

SLT
2B

LC
Dterm

NT1

BRT

ISDN

D
DLC

CLOCK
SIGNAL

TDSW

BRT : Basic Rate Interface Trunk

NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO : Phase Locked Oscillator

MP
(PLO)

NOTE 1: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

NOTE 2: We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the system to the public network
using the BRT card (Set the second data of CM35 Y=79 to 0).
For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT card, when the system is established far
from the public network, the communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades
away.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

NOTE 3: When connecting the system to the public network by the point-to-multipoint connection that the
plural ISDN terminals and the system use the same B-channels as shown below, during the Bchannels are used by the ISDN terminals, the terminals in the system cannot call to the outside
party (receive ROT, if they call) even if the B-channels of BRT card are idle. Because the system
cannot recognize that the B-channels are used by ISDN terminals.
Therefore, divide the B-channels into the system and ISDN terminals or use the D-channel
packet for the communication of ISDN terminals.
PBX

BRT

B-channels

ISDN Terminal

ISDN

ISDN Terminal

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

System Outline of ISDN-VPN

The Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service which provides an interoffice private line via an ISDN
network.
When you dial a station number (Called Party Subaddress), the system sends a pre-assigned office number
of a called party together with the Called Party Subaddress to an ISDN network. With this function, an
interoffice call can be made by only dialing a station number (Called Party Subaddress).
The following figure shows an example of using the VPN.

Example of ISDN-VPN
When an opposite office can interface with the ISDN network.
PBX

0345678910 (Office No.)

PBX

1234 (Called Party Subaddress)

Dial 1234
Calling Party

Called Party

ISDN

Station No. 1234

B
(034567-8910)

Continued on next page

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Example of ISDN-VPN
When an opposite office cannot interface with the ISDN network.
PBX

0345678910 (Office No.)

PBX

1234 (Called Party Subaddress)

Dial 1234
Calling Party

ISDN

B
(034567-8910)

A
Tie Line

1234

Called Party

Station No. 1234

10

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

System Outline of ISDN Terminal

The system is configured with an ISDN Line Circuit (ILC) for the line interface of an ISDN Terminal and
an ISDN Channel Handler (ICH) for layer 2 protocol processing (LAP-D).
The following figures show the system outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-PRI).
(a) For PN-2ILCA card

System Outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-PRI)

PBX
Point-to-Point
Connection

ILC
ISDN
Terminal
(TE)

1.5 M/2 M PCM

DIGITAL LINE (23B/30B + D)

23B/30B

2B 2

DTI
/PRT

2D

NT1

ISDN

D
CLOCK
SIGNAL

Point-to-Multipoint
Connection

2B 2
ILC

TA

Data
Terminal

2D

8D

ISDN Terminal
(TE)
SLT

ICH

LC

DCH

TDSW

MP
(PLO)

DCH : D Channel Handler

DTI : Digital Trunk Interface
ICH : ISDN Channel Handler
ILC : ISDN Line Circuit
LC : Line Circuit
NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO : Phase Locked Oscillator
PRT : Primary Rate Interface Trunk
TA : Terminal Adapter

NOTE 1: The following connections are only available.

ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal Connection
ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk Connection
ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal Connection
ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone Connection
ISDN Terminal to Dterm Connection
NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.
11

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

(b) For PN-2ILCC card

System Outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-PRI)

PBX
Point-to-Point
Connection

ILC
ISDN
Terminal
(TE)

1.5 M/2 M PCM

DIGITAL LINE (23B/30B + D)

23B/30B

2B 2

DTI
/PRT

NT1

ISDN

D
CLOCK
SIGNAL

Point-to-Multipoint
Connection

2B 2
ILC

TA
D
Data
Terminal

ISDN Terminal
(TE)
SLT
LC

DCH

TDSW

MP
(PLO)

DCH : D Channel Handler

DTI : Digital Trunk Interface
ILC : ISDN Line Circuit
LC : Line Circuit
NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO : Phase Locked Oscillator
PRT : Primary Rate Interface Trunk
TA : Terminal Adapter

NOTE 1: The following connections are only available.

ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal Connection
ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk Connection
ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal Connection
ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone Connection
ISDN Terminal to Dterm Connection
NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

12

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

The following figures show the system outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-BRI).
(a) For PN-2ILCA card

System Outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-BRI)

PBX
Point-to-Point
Connection
ILC
ISDN
Terminal
(TE)

2-CHANNEL PCM
DIGITAL LINE (2B + D)

2B

2B 2

BRT

NT1

ISDN

2D
D

Point-to-Multipoint
Connection

CLOCK
SIGNAL

2B 2
ILC

TA

Data
Terminal

2D

8D

ISDN Terminal
(TE)

ICH

SLT
LC
TDSW

MP
(PLO)
BRT: Basic Rate Interface Trunk
ICH : ISDN Channel Handler
ILC : ISDN Line Circuit
LC : Line Circuit
NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO: Phase Locked Oscillator
TA : Terminal Adapter

NOTE 1: The following connections are only available.

ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone Connection
ISDN Terminal to Dterm Connection
NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

13

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

(b) For PN-2ILCC card

System Outline of ISDN Terminal (for ISDN-BRI)

PBX
Point-to-Point
Connection
ILC
ISDN
Terminal
(TE)

2-CHANNEL PCM
DIGITAL LINE (2B + D)

2B

2B 2

BRT

NT1

ISDN

Point-to-Multipoint
Connection

CLOCK
SIGNAL

2B 2
ILC

TA
D
Data
Terminal

ISDN Terminal
(TE)
SLT
LC
TDSW

MP
(PLO)
BRT: Basic Rate Interface Trunk
ILC : ISDN Line Circuit
LC : Line Circuit
NT1 : Network Termination One
PLO: Phase Locked Oscillator
TA : Terminal Adapter

NOTE 1: The following connections are only available.

ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal Connection (S/T Interface)
ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone Connection
ISDN Terminal to Dterm Connection
NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

14

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

DTI
The Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) interfaces the PBX directly to 24/30-channel PCM transmission line.
The DTI has the following functions.
For 24DTI:
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loopback Test (Local/Remote Loopback)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For 30DTI:
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loopback Test (Local/Remote Loopback)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For connections of 24DTI and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connection of
30DTI and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.

DCH
The D Channel Handler (DCH) provides the D Channel signaling interface through the DTI to an ISDN
exchange, and it is responsible for signaling between the PBX and the ISDN exchange under control of
the system MP.

15

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

PRT
The Primary Rate Interface Trunk (PRT) provides the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (1.5 Mbps PCM-23B
+ D/2 Mbps PCM-30B + D) and a built-in D Channel Handler (DCH). The PRT has the following functions.
For 24PRT:
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loopback Test (Local/Remote Loopback)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For 30PRT:
Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)
Alarm Detection/Insertion
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission
Loopback Test (Local/Remote Loopback)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)
For connections of 24PRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connection
of 30PRT and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.
NOTE:

ISDN requires B8ZS Line coding with Extended superframing (ESF) format.

16

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

BRT
The Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) provides one, two or four physical interface to the ISDN-Basic Rate
Interface service (192 Kbps PCM-2B + D).
The BRT has the following functions.

Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI Format) (S/T Interface)

Signaling Insertion/Extraction
Frame Synchronization
Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission

For connections of BRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cables can be used.
NOTE:

We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the system to the public network
using the BRT card (Set the second data of CM35 Y=79 to 0).
For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT card, when the system is established far
from the public network, the communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades
away.

17

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

The way of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment for the combination of the terminal connection
form and each BRT card shows the table below.
: Available : Not available

TEI Value
BRT

Non-Automatic TEI Assignment

Automatic TEI
Assignment

Terminal
Connection Form
for ISDN-BRI

2-63

64-126

Point-to-Point Connection

Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Service Profile ID (SPID)

for Voice Channel
[North America Only]

*1

PN-4BRTA-A Point-to-Point Connection

Point-to-Multipoint Connection

*2, *3, *4

Service Profile ID (SPID)

for Voice Channel
[North America Only]

BRT Card
PN-BRTA/
PN-2BRTC/
PN-2BRTK

*1 TEI value is assigned for each B channel. Therefore, two TEI values are used.
*2 Automatic TEI Assignment (TEI=64-126) is available for Series 3800 software or later. When using Series 3700 software or before, use Non-Automatic TEI Assignment (TEI=0).
*3 Non-Automatic TEI Assignment and Automatic TEI Assignment can be assigned for each D channel.
[Series 3800 software or later]
*4 Assign Non-Automatic TEI Assignment when connecting to the regular ISDN network. According
to the specification of the ISDN network, assign Automatic TEI Assignment only when Automatic
TEI Assignment is required.

18

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

PLO
The Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO) equipped on the MP card is responsible to synchronize the system to
ISDN clocks.
The PLO generates the clock signals according to the source clocks received from network. The source
clock signals are extracted at DTI/BRT/PRT cards and supplied to the PLO. Two clock routes are available;
one is the route 0 to receive clock signals from DTI0/BRT0/PRT0, and the other is a standby route 1 (DTI1/
BRT1/PRT1) to receive clock signals when no clock signals appear on the route 0. When no clock signals
come from either route 0 or route 1, the PLO keeps generating the clock signals at the frequency of the last
source clock. The PLO can receive different frequency of source clocks from the route 0 and route 1.
The figure below shows an example of clock supply route.

Clock Supply Route

PBX
TDSW

NOTE
DTI0/BRT0
/PRT0

ISDN

DTI1/BRT1
/PRT1

PLO

: CLOCK SIGNAL SUPPLY ROUTE 0

: CLOCK SIGNAL SUPPLY ROUTE 1

NOTE:

DTI0/BRT0/PRT0 and DTI1/BRT1/PRT1 must be mounted in PIM0.

19

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM OUTLINE

ICH
The ISDN Channel Handler (ICH) provides the D channel signaling interface and controls an ILC (Layer
2 and 3).

ILC
The ISDN Line Circuit (ILC) provides a physical interfaces to the ISDN Terminal. The interface provides
for a maximum of 2 line circuit.
In the station to station call, the Calling Party Number sent to the ISDN Terminal is as follows.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
When calling from Single Line Telephone/Dterm
By setting CM08>584, you can select Station Number or Calling Party Number (set by CM12
Y=12/13) to send to the ISDN Terminal as follows.

SUPPORT SOFTWARE
VERSION
Series 3700 R12.2 software or later

Series 3700 R12.1 software or before

CM08>584

SENT NUMBER

Station Number is sent.

Calling Party Number assigned by

CM12 Y=12/13 is sent.

Not available

Calling Party Number assigned by

CM12 Y=12/13 is sent.

When calling from ISDN Terminal

Calling Party Number is sent to the terminated ISDN Terminal, when the originated ISDN
Terminal sends Calling Party Number (set by the ISDN Terminal or CM12 Y=12/13).
Station Number of the originated ISDN Terminal is sent to the terminated ISDN Terminal, when
the originated ISDN Terminal doesnt send Calling Party Number.

20

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Event Based CCIS allows a PBX customer who does not have tie lines to use the various Common Channel
Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) features by using ISDN lines as CCIS virtual tie lines. For the PBX customer
who usually has low traffic, Event Based CCIS is available between NEC NEAX PBXs.
The figure below shows the system outline of Event Based CCIS.

System Outline of Event Based CCIS

REGULAR ISDN CONNECTION

ISDN NETWORK

PBX

PBX
DTI/BRT
/PRT

DTI/BRT
/PRT

CCH

CCH

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

EVENT BASED CCIS CONNECTION

ISDN NETWORK

NEC PBX

NEC PBX
DTI/BRT
/PRT

DTI/BRT
/PRT

CCH

CCH

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

21

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Common Channel and Voice Channel Link Control

When the call is a regular ISDN call, or when there is no call on the PBX, the common signaling channel
and the voice channel for the virtual tie lines are disconnected.
If the virtual tie lines are all busy, or when the virtual tie lines cannot be connected due to a line fault, a
call is transmitted to the opposite office via ISDN network as a regular ISDN call not as a CCIS call.
When a predetermined time passed after all calls finish, the voice channels and common signaling channel
are released and the CCIS link is disconnected. The release timer is set by system data programming for
the common signaling channel and voice channels.

Release Timing of Virtual Tie Line and CCIS Link

n second
Voice ch 1 (B2)
n second
Voice ch 2 (B3)
m second
CCIS link (B1)
Set VT (B3)

Release VT (B1)

Set VT (B1)
Release VT (B3)

Set VT (B2)

Release VT (B2)
Release CCIS (B3)
n, m : Release timer
2.4 seconds-maximum 28 minutes
VT : Virtual Tie Line

Release CCIS (B2)

22

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

For Event Based CCIS, the Virtual Trunks which are used as a No. 7 CCIS trunk.
Virtual Trunk:
The Virtual Trunk consists of a Home-Side Trunk and a Mate-Side Trunk. The Home-Side Trunk is
connected to the station side, and the Mate-Side Trunk is connected to network side of the PBX
virtually.
The virtual trunks do not exist actually, but are handled as No. 7 CCIS trunk by the system, for system
data. ISDN subaddress or ISDN Indial number is used to notify the CCIS channel number for virtual
tie line and establish a CCIS link and individual voice links between offices.

Virtual Trunk
TDSW

DTI/BRT/PRT

MATE-SIDE
LC/TRK

HOME-SIDE

ISDN

VIRTUAL
TRUNK

CCH Card:
The CCH card is used to handle the common channel signaling.
DTI/BRT/PRT Card:
The system uses the same interface trunk for regular ISDN connection and the virtual tie line
connection on Event Based CCIS.
ISDN Protocol Analyzer:
For ISDN PRI, the protocol analyzer must be able to support ISDN exchange, such as AT&T, Nortel.
For North America, it must support National ISDN 2 (NI-2) protocols.
For ISDN BRI, the protocol analyzer must be an S/T interface. For North America, it must support
National ISDN 1 (NI-1) protocol.
Both analyzers must be capable of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3 (Q921 & Q931) information.

23

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Event Based CCIS Feature List

Event Based CCIS Feature List
: Available : Not available

SERVICE FEATURE

AVAILABILITY

Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication-CCIS

Attendant Controlled Conference-CCIS

Automatic Recall-CCIS

Brokerage-Hot Line-CCIS

Busy Lamp Field (BLF)-CCIS

Busy Verification-CCIS

Call Back-CCIS

Call Forwarding-All Calls-CCIS

Call Forwarding-Busy Line-CCIS

Call Forwarding-Dont Answer-CCIS

Call Forwarding-Intercept-CCIS

Call Forwarding-Override-CCIS

Call Processing Indication-CCIS

Call Transfer-All Calls-CCIS

Call Transfer-Attendant-CCIS

Called Station Status Display-CCIS

Calling Name Display-CCIS

Calling Number Display-CCIS

CCIS Networking via IP

Centralized Billing-CCIS

Centralized Day/Night Mode Change-CCIS

Centralized E911-CCIS

Centralized MAT-CCIS

Consultation Hold-All Calls-CCIS

Data Line Security-CCIS

Deluxe Traveling Class Mark-CCIS

REMARKS
NOTE 4

NOTE 2

Continued on next page

24

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Event Based CCIS Feature List

: Available : Not available

SERVICE FEATURE

AVAILABILITY

REMARKS

Dial Access to Attendant-CCIS

Digital Display-Station-CCIS

Digital Display-Trunk-CCIS

Direct-In Termination-CCIS

Distinctive Ringing-CCIS

Do Not Disturb-CCIS

Dual Hold-CCIS

Elapsed Time Display-CCIS

Flexible Numbering of Stations-CCIS

Hands-Free Answerback-CCIS

Hot Line-CCIS

House Phone-CCIS

Incoming Call Identification-CCIS

Individual Attendant Access-CCIS

LDN Night Connection-CCIS

Link Alarm Display-CCIS

Link Reconnect-CCIS

Message Waiting Lamp Setting-Attendant-CCIS

NOTE 3

Message Waiting Lamp Setting-Station-CCIS

NOTE 3

Miscellaneous Trunk Access-CCIS

Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction-CCIS

Multiple Call Forwarding-All Calls-CCIS

Multiple Call Forwarding-Busy Line-CCIS

Multiple Call Forwarding-Dont Answer-CCIS

Multiple Console Operation-CCIS

Network Station Number-CCIS (FCCS)

NOTE 5

Continued on next page

25

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Event Based CCIS Feature List

: Available : Not available

SERVICE FEATURE

AVAILABILITY

Night Connection-Fixed-CCIS

Night Connection-Flexible-CCIS

Outgoing Trunk Queuing-CCIS

Paging Access-CCIS

Restriction from Outgoing Calls-CCIS

Service Display-CCIS

Single-Digit Station Calling-CCIS

Station-Controlled Conference-CCIS

Station-to-Station Calling-CCIS

Station-to-Station Calling-Operator Assistance-CCIS

Toll Restriction-3/6 Digits-CCIS

Trunk Answer from Any Station-CCIS

Trunk-to-Trunk Restriction-CCIS

Uniform Numbering Plan-CCIS

Voice Call-CCIS

Voice Mail Integration-CCIS

Voice Mail Live Record-CCIS

Voice Mail Private Password-CCIS

REMARKS

NOTE 4

NOTE 1: The voice channel and the common signaling channel keep connecting after the calls finish according to the release timer data. Therefore, while the CCIS link is kept up by the timer, the
features are available.
NOTE 2: The billing information is sent while the CCH link is connected. If the sending of billing information has failed, it is sent again when a new CCH link is established by the next call.
NOTE 3: As a remote office, this feature is available on 2000 IPS.
NOTE 4: An attendant/extension of the 2000 IPS cannot be a conference leader.
NOTE 5: This service is available when the Attendant Console is provided at the 2400 IPX office on the
network.

26

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

OUTLINE OF EVENT BASED CCIS

Event Based CCIS Service Conditions

Event Based CCIS connection is available between NEC NEAX PBXs.
The maximum number of the virtual tie lines is 16 channels per one system, including both
common signaling channels and voice channels.
This feature supports voice calls only. Supported objects at PBX transmission side: single line
telephone, Dterm, DID/E&M/Ring Down (analog/T1/E1) tandem calls.
The data calls are transmitted via the regular ISDN network.
The number of originating call from the ISDN trunk is counted as Peg Count when using the ISDN
line for the virtual tie line by route basis.
Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line can be treated as regular tie line calls.
Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line can be treated on tandem calls.
The voice channel of the virtual tie line is released after the call is finished.
The common signaling channel of virtual tie line is released after all calls on voice channels are
finished. The release timer is determined by system timer programming for the voice channels and
the common signaling channels.
The ISDN line used for the virtual tie line can also be used as a regular ISDN line.
The trunk route used for the virtual tie line can be distinguished from the regular ISDN line by
assigning different LCR data in system programming.

27

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CARD NAME AND FUNCTION

CARD NAME AND FUNCTION

The table below shows the circuit card name and function for ISDN.

ISDN Card Name and Function

CARD NAME

FUNCTIONAL
NAME

PN-BRTA

BRT

1-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card

Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-2BRTC

BRT

2-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card

Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-2BRTK
[For UK]

BRT

2-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card

Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-4BRTA-A

BRT

4-line Basic Rate (2B + D) Interface Trunk Card

Accommodates four 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-24DTA-C

DTI

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card

Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-30DTC-C

DTI

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card

Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-2ILCA

ILC

2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card

Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.

PN-2ILCC

ILC

2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card

Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
This card does not require PN-SC03-B (ICH) card.

PN-24PRTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B + D) Interface Card

Provided a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-30PRTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (30B + D) Interface Card

Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-DTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B + D/30B + D) Interface Card

Provided a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-DTB

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B + D/30B + D) Interface Card

Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

28

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CARD NAME AND FUNCTION

ISDN Card Name and Function

CARD NAME

FUNCTIONAL
NAME

PN-DTA

CCH

Common Channel Handler Card for Erent Based CCIS

Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.

PN-DTB

CCH

Common Channel Handler Card for Event Based CCIS

Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.

PN-SC00

CCH

Common Channel Handler Card

Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
No. 7 CCIS.

PN-SC01

DCH

D-channel Handler Card

Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary
Rate (23B + D) interface or WCS Roaming interface.

PN-SC03-B

ICH

ISDN-channel Handler Card

Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).

FUNCTION

29

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CAPACITY

SYSTEM CAPACITY
The table below shows the system capacity of the ISDN-PRI/ISDN-BRI.
When you use the NEAX IPSDM, refer to NEAX IPSDM Hardware Installation Guide.

System Capacity for ISDN-PRI

System Capacity for ISDN-PRI
CAPACITY

DESCRIPTION

24DTI

30DTI

24PRT

30PRT

DTI Card

DCH Card

192

248

PRT Card

Trunks for PRT

192

248

Trunks for DTI

ISDN Routes

ICH Card

16

ILC Card (2ILCA)

64

ILC Card (2ILCC)

16

Port per DTI Card

24

31

Port per DCH Card

Port per PRT Card

24 + 1
(DCH)

31 + 1
(DCH)

Port per ICH Card

Port per ILC Card (2ILCA)

Port per ILC Card (2ILCC)

No. of ISDN
Terminal
(Simultaneous
Connection)

P to P
Connection

PN-2ILCA

128

PN-2ILCC

32

P to MP
Connection

PN-2ILCA

256

PN-2ILCC

64
Continued on next page

30

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CAPACITY

System Capacity for ISDN-PRI

CAPACITY

DESCRIPTION
No. of ISDN
Terminal
(Max. number
of terminal)

24DTI

30DTI

24PRT

P to P
Connection

PN-2ILCA

128

PN-2ILCC

32

P to MP
Connection

PN-2ILCA

512

PN-2ILCC

256

30PRT

System Capacity for ISDN-BRI

System Capacity for ISDN-BRI
DESCRIPTION

CAPACITY

BRT Card (BRT/2BRT/4BRT)

12/24/24

Trunks for BRT (BRT/2BRT/4BRT)

24/96/192

ICH Card

16

ILC Card (2ILCA)

64

ILC Card (2ILCC)

16

Port per BRT Card (BRT/2BRT/4BRT)

2/4/8

Port per ICH Card

Port per ILC Card (2ILCA)

Port per ILC Card (2ILCC)

No. of ISDN
Terminal
(Simultaneous
Connection)

P to P
Connection

PN-2ILCA

128

PN-2ILCC

32

P to MP
Connection

PN-2ILCA

256

PN-2ILCC

64
Continued on next page

31

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CAPACITY

System Capacity for ISDN-BRI

CAPACITY

DESCRIPTION
No. of ISDN
Terminal
(Max. number
of terminal)

24DTI

30DTI

24PRT

P to P
Connection

PN-2ILCA

128

PN-2ILCC

32

P to MP
Connection

PN-2ILCA

512

PN-2ILCC

256

32

30PRT

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CONDITIONS

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Time Slot Assignment Condition
As shown below, the DCH/ICH/BRT/2BRT card uses the time slot on the basic highway 4. Therefore, the
total number of time slots for all DCH/ICH/BRT/2BRT cards must be 128 time slots or less including all
other application processor cards, which use the highway 4.
The 24DTI/30DTI/24PRT/30PRT/4BRT/2ILCC card can use the time slot on both the basic and expanded
highway 4 and 6. Therefore, the total number of time slots for all 24DTI/30DTI/24PRT/30PRT/4BRT/
2ILCC cards must be 256 time slots or less including all other application processor cards, which use the
highway 4 and 6.

Accommodation of DTI/DCH/ICH/BRT/PRT into TDSW

FOR L/T CARDS: MAXIMUM 512 TIME SLOTS PER SYSTEM

TDSW (1024 TIME SLOTS)

HW4

FP0

MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS

FP1

MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS

FP2

MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS

FP3

MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS

BRT

2 TIME SLOTS/CARD (BRT)

4 TIME SLOTS/CARD (2BRT)

DCH

1 TIME SLOT/CARD

ICH

4 TIME SLOTS/CARD

PRT

24PRT: 25 TIME SLOTS/CARD

30PRT: 32 TIME SLOTS/CARD

DTI

24DTI: 24 TIME SLOTS/CARD

30DTI: 31 TIME SLOTS/CARD

BRT

8 TIME SLOTS/CARD (4BRT)

HW6
ILC
(2ILCC)

8 TIME SLOTS/CARD

FOR BASIC HIGHWAY4: MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS PER SYSTEM

FOR EXPANDED HIGHWAY6: MAXIMUM 128 TIME SLOTS PER SYSTEM

FOR AP CARDS: MAXIMUM 256 TIME SLOTS PER SYSTEM

33

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CONDITIONS

Time Slot Allocation for DTI/PRT/DCH Card

On each DTI/PRT card, the system recognizes the lowest and highest channel numbers to which trunk
numbers have been assigned, and allocates time slots to all the channels within them. If trunk numbers are
assigned to discontinuous channels in this case, the system also allocates time slots to channels not assigned.
For example, as shown below, even when Channel 1 through Channel 10 have been assigned by the system
data programming (CM07 Y=01) except Channel 5, the system allocates a total of 10 time slots for all the
ten channels. Therefore, to avoid allocation of unnecessary time slots, it is recommended that consecutive
channels are assigned on each DTI/PRT card.
In the case of the DCH card, one time slot is allocated for setting up a fixed path between the DTI and the
DCH by assigning Channel 16 of the DTI as the D Channel.

Time Slot Allocation for DTI

10

DXXX

DXXX

DXXX

NONE

DXXX

DXXX

CH0

NONE

34

HIGHEST CHANNEL

10 TIME SLOTS ARE

ALLOCATED EVEN
WHEN CH5 IS NOT
ASSIGNED.

LOWEST CHANNEL

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

SYSTEM CONDITIONS

Line Distance between PBX and NT1/ISDN Terminal

The figure below shows the line distance between PBX and NT1 and the line distance between PBX and
ISDN Terminal.

Line Distance between PBX and NT1/ISDN Terminal

Maximum 600 m
(1965 ft.*)

Maximum 1000 m
(3280 ft.*)

MDF

(A)

(B)
No. 1

PBX
ILC

BRT

NT1

To ISDN

ILC

DTI/PRT

NT1

To ISDN

No. 8
Maximum
50 m
(164 ft.*)
Maximum 400 m
(1310 ft.*)

(C)

Maximum 1758 m
(5764 ft.*) ...24DTI/PRT for DS-1
Maximum 200 m
(655 ft.**)....24DTI/PRT for DSX-1
Maximum 400 m
(1310 ft.*) ...30DTI/PRT

ILC
No. 1

No. 8

Maximum 150 m
(491 ft.*)

: ISDN Terminal
NT1 : Network Termination One
(A) : Point-to-Point Connection
(B) : Point-to-Multipoint Connection
(Extended Passive Bus)
(C) : Point-to-Multipoint Connection
(Short Distance Passive Bus)

NOTE 1: The line distance marked by * shows the value when the 0.5 twisted-pair cable is used.
NOTE 2: The line distance marked by ** shows the value when the 0.65 twisted-pair cable is used.

35

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

DTI SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission Characteristics
Transmission Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
(1)

24-CHANNEL

30-CHANNEL

Output
Line Rate

1.544 Mbps 50 ppm

2.048 Mbps 50 ppm

Line Code

AMI with ZCS/B8ZS*

High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3)

Line Impedance

100

75
(Coaxial Cable)
120
(Twisted-Pair Cable)

Pulse Amplitude
(Base to Peak)

3 volts 0.6 volts

2.37 volts nominal

(Coaxial Cable)
3 volts nominal
(Twisted-Pair Cable)

Pulse Width

324 ns 30 ns

244 ns nominal
Continued on next page

*AMI : Alternate Mark Inversion

ZCS : Zero Code Suppression
B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

36

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

Transmission Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
(2)

24-CHANNEL

30-CHANNEL

Input
Line Rate

1.544 Mbps 200 bps

(130 ppm)

2.048 Mbps 50 ppm

Pulse Amplitude
(Base to Peak)

1.5 volts 3 volts

1.5 volts 2.7 volts

(Coaxial Cable)
1.5 volts 3.3 volts
(Twisted-Pair Cable)

Frame Synchronization Pattern

001011 (24MF)

Input Jitter

ITU-T Fig. 1/G743

ITU-T Fig. 1/G743

Wander

+138UI, 193UI
or
138UI, +193UI

ITU-T G823

Maximum 200 m (655 ft.)

(with 0.65 (22 ABAM)
twisted-pair cable)

Maximum 400 m
(with 0.65 twisted-pair cable)

Cable Length from PBX to NT1

37

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

Frame Configuration of 24DTI

According to the AT&T Specifications for 24-Channel transmission, there are two types of frame configurations: 12-Multi Frame and 24-Multi Frame.
(1)

12-Multi Frame
The frame has 12-Multi Frames, and each Multi frame has a 24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel)
and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table in next page
shows frame bit assignment.

DTI Frame Configuration (12-Multi Frame)

S

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRAME 1

FRAME 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRAME 3

FRAME 12

125 s
S: Superframe Bit

38

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

12-Multi Frame Bit Assignment

S BIT
FRAME No.

TERMINAL SYNCHRONIZATION
(FT)

2
3

0
0

4
5

0
1

6
7

1
0

8
9

1
1

10
11

SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION
(FS)

1
0

12

*The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.

*Frames are repeated in the order shown above.

39

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

(2)

24-Multi Frame
This configuration has 24-Multi Frames and each Multi frame has a 24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/
channel) and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table in
next page shows frame bit assignment.

DTI Frame Configuration (24-Multi Frame)

S

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRAME 1

FRAME 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRAME 3

FRAME 24

125 s
S: Superframe Bit

40

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

24-Multi Frame Bit Assignment

S BIT
FRAME No.

FRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION

4 Kbps DATA LINK

CB1

3
4

m
0

CB2

7
8

m
0

10

CB3

11
12

m
1

13

14

CB4

15
16

m
0

17

18

CB5

19
20

m
1

21

22

CB6

23
24

CRC

m
1

*The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.

*Frames are repeated in the order shown above.
*m in the 4 Kbps Data Link column means that the frame is usually assigned to 1.

41

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

Frame Configuration of 30DTI

Based on 30-channel transmission method of ITU-T Specification, the frame configuration consists of 16multi frame, each frame having 32 time slots.
Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table in next page shows the details of time slot assignment.

Frame Configuration of 30DTI

TS0

FRAME 0

TS1

TS2

FRAME 1

TS15

FRAME 2

FRAME 3

TS16

TS17

TS30

FRAME 14

TS31

FRAME 15

125 sec

42

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

Time Slot Assignment of 30DTI

TIME
SLOT No.
TS0

EVEN No. FRAME

ODD No. FRAME

Frame Alignment Signal (FAS)

b0

b7

b0

b7

FAS

REMOTE ALARM

CRC BIT

TS1

CRC BIT 0: NORMAL

1: FRAME LOSS

Voice Channel (B channel)

CH1
~

TS15

CH15
D Channel Signaling

TS17

Voice Channel (B channel)

CH17

TS16

TS31

CH31

43

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

44

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION

This chapter explains the hardware installation procedure to provide ISDN

interface to the PBX.

PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ..........................................................
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI ........................
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI .......................
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL ...........
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EVENT BASED CCIS ....

45

46
49
52
63
72
78

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
Static Electricity Guard
You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

Static Electricity Guard

WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX

FRAME GROUND SCREW

WRIST STRAP

WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR
SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

Continued on next page

46

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard

WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM
THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD

CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG

CIRCUIT
CARD

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT

CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.

The mark shown below is attached to the sheet for the work in which circuit cards are handled. When engaging in such work, the installer must be careful not to cause damage by static electricity.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

47

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
1. You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card.
If you touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.
PBX

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

2. You must wait for 30 seconds before plugging the circuit card again when unplugging the
circuit card while the operating power is being supplied.

48

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
ISDN-PRI Required Equipment
The table below shows the equipment required to provide ISDN with Primary Rate Interface to the system.

ISDN-PRI Required Equipment

EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY

PN-24DTA-C
(24DTI)

24-channel DTI Card

1-8

PN-24PRTA
(24PRT)

24-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-DTA
(24PRT)

24-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-DTB
(24PRT)

24-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-30DTC-C
(30DTI)

30-channel DTI Card

1-8

PN-30PRTA
(30PRT)

30-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-DTA
(30PRT)

30-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-DTB
(30PRT)

30-channel PRT Card

1-8

PN-SC01
(DCH)

D Channel Handler Card

1-8

PZ-M542/PZ-M557
(CONN)

Connection Card for Coaxial

Cable

49

As required

REMARKS
For 23B + D

For 30B + D

1 DTI/card
1 DTI/card, 1 PRT/card
Maximum 2 per PIM

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT

ISDN-BRI Required Equipment

The table below shows the equipment required to provide ISDN with Basic Rate Interface to the system.

ISDN-BRI Required Equipment

EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY

PN-BRTA
(BRT)

1-line BRT Card

1-12

PN-2BRTC/PN-2BRTK
(BRT)

2-line BRT Card

1-24

PN-4BRTA-A
(BRT)

4-line BRT Card

1-24

REMARKS

Maximum 6 per PIM

ISDN Terminal Required Equipment

The table below shows the equipment required to provide ISDN Terminal interface to the system, in addition to the required equipment for ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI.

ISDN Terminal Required Equipment

EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY

REMARKS

PN-SC03-B
(ICH)

ISDN Channel Handler Card

for PN-2ILCA Card

1-16

Controls 4 cards of PN2ILCA

PN-2ILCA
(ILC)

ISDN Line Circuit Card

1-64

2 terminals/card

PN-2ILCC
(ILC)

ISDN Line Circuit Card

1-16

2terminals/card

NOTE:

When using the PN-2ILCC (ILC) card, the PN-SC03-B (ICH) card is not required.

50

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT

Event Based CCIS Required Equipment

The table below shows the required equipment to provide Event Based CCIS to the system, in addition to
the required equipment for ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI.

Event Based CCIS Required Equipment

EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY

REMARKS

PN-SC00
(CCH)

Common Channel Handler

Card

1-8

1 DTI/card

PN-DTA/PN-DTB
(CCH)

Common Channel Handler

Card

1-8

1 DTI/card

NOTE:

For Event Based CCIS, PN-24CCTA/PN-30CCTA (CCT)/PN-DTA (PRT) card cannot be used.

51

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Install the equipment for ISDN-PRI according to the procedure shown below.
NOTE:

For Call Recording of ISDN call, install the equipment for SMDR or CIS.
For details, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual.

Installation Procedure for ISDN-PRI

START

Mounting PRT Card

Page 53

Mounting DTI and

DCH Card

Mounting CONN Card

Page 53

Page 54 NOTE

Selection of PLO in
MP Card

Page 57

DTI/PRT Cable
Connection via MDF

Page 58

Cable Connection
via CONN Card

Page 61 NOTE

END

NOTE:

This procedure is required when you provide CONN card to connect a coaxial cable for DTI/
PRT.

52

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Mounting DTI and DCH Card

Mounting PRT Card
(1)

(2)

Before mounting the DTI (PN-24DTA-C/PN-30DTC-C) card and the DCH

(PN-SC01) card, or the PRT (PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-DTA/PN-DTB)
card, set the MB switch to UP position, and set the other switches to
appropriate position. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 241, Page 248,
Page 298, Page 254, Page 262, Page 269, Page 276

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Mount the DTI card and the DCH card, or mount the PRT card in the following AP slots of PIM0PIM7.
PIM0-7: AP00-AP11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU) : AP00-AP10 slots
If you use the PRT card, the DCH card is not required because the PRT has a built-in DCH.
NOTE:

(3)

The DTI/PRT card (DTI0/PRT0, DTI1/PRT1) which sends a clock signal to PLO of the
MP card must be mounted in the AP slots on PIM0.

After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.

53

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Mounting CONN Card

When providing CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) card to connect a coaxial cable for DTI/PRT, do the following installation.
Page 303,

(1)

Confirm the correct switch settings of the CONN card. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 305

(2)

Connect the CONN card to LTC connector on BWB in the PIM which accommodates DTI/PRT cards
as shown below.

STEP1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off the
PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it to the card
with screws.
When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP1.
NOTE:

The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.

Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE

PLATE

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

SCREW

54

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

STEP2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on BWB in
PIM.
NOTE:

Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards cannot be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors. LTC0 and
LTC2, or LTC0 and LTC3, or LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PIM
LTC CONNECTOR

LTC
LTC

1
LTC

0
LTC

When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3

When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2

LTC CONNECTOR

LT CONNECTOR

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

55

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

STEP3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw.
NOTE 1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
NOTE 2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all the cards should
be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured with screws. For
installation of the PIM CARD STOPPER, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual, CHAPTER 2, MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS.

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

CARD STOPPER

SCREW

56

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Selection of PLO in MP Card

(1)

Select the PLO input by the switch settings of MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/

PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card as follows.
Selection of PLO0 input
For clock receiver office:

SW2-2

SW2-3

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock

[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/
PN-24PRT/PZ-M649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FUNCTION

For clock source office:

SW2-2
SW2-3
OFF
OFF
Selection of PLO1 input
For clock receiver office:

SW4-3

SW4-4

FUNCTION

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock

[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/
PN-24PRT/PZ-M649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

For clock source office:

SW4-4
SW4-3
OFF
OFF
(2)

Mount the MP card in the MP slot of PIM0.

57

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

DTI/PRT Cable Connection via MDF

When you use a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a NT1 equipment via the MDF as shown below.
Location of AP Slots and LTC Connectors for DTI/PRT
Page 59
Example of MDF Cross Connection for DTI/PRT
Page 60

DTI/PRT Cable Connection via MDF

BWB

PBX

MDF
DTI/PRT

NT1

TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE
(SHIELD TYPE)

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3
CONNECTOR
MAXIMUM 1758 m (5764 ft.).. 24DTI/PRT for DS-1
MAXIMUM 200 m (655 ft.)...... 24DTI/PRT for DSX-1
MAXIMUM 400 m (1310 ft.).... 30DTI/PRT

58

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Location of AP Slots and LTC Connectors for DTI/PRT

L
T
0
0
/
A
P
0
0

LTC0
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA

RA
TA

RA
TA

MJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
1
/
A
P
0
1

L
T
0
2
/
A
P
0
2

L
T
0
3
/
A
P
0
3

L
T
0
4
/
A
P
0
4

L
T
0
5
/
A
P
0
5

L
T
0
6
/
A
P
0
6

LTC1
RB
TB
AP00
SLOT

RB
TB
AP01
SLOT

RB
TB
AP02
SLOT

MN

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA

RA
TA

RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
7
/
A
P
0
7

L
T
0
8
/
A
P
0
8

L
T
0
9
/
A
P
0
9

L
T
1
0
/
A
P
1
0

L
T
1
1
/
A
P
1
1

LTC2
RB
TB
AP03
SLOT

RB
TB
AP04
SLOT

RB
TB
AP05
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

59

RA
TA

RA
TA

RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LTC3
RB
TB
AP06
SLOT

RB
TB
AP07
SLOT

RB
TB

AP08
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA

RA
TA

RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB
TB

RB
TB

RB
TB

AP09
SLOT

AP10
SLOT

AP11
SLOT

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for DTI/PRT

PIM0
LTC1
DTI/PRT

MDF

RECEIVE
AP05
RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

TO NT1

TRANSFER

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

44

44

19

20

45

45

20

60

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Cable Connection via CONN Card

When you use a coaxial cable, connect the cable to a NT1 equipment via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
card as shown below.
The figure in next page shows an example of the cable connection when the DTI/PRT card is mounted on
the AP05 slot of PIM0.

Cable Connection via the CONN Card

BWB

PBX

NT1

DTI/PRT
COAXIAL CABLE

CONN
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 6 dB loss at 1024 kHz

61

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-PRI

Example of Coaxial Cable Connection

PIM0
J

LTC1
P

RA

17

17

RB

42

42

TA

18

18

TB

43

43

DTI/PRT

CONN

RECEIVE

AP05
RCV

TO NT1
TRS
SEND

1 LTC1 CONNECTOR

2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

44

44

19

20

45

45

20

62

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Install the equipment for ISDN-BRI according to the procedure shown below.
NOTE:

For Call Recording of ISDN call, install the equipment for SMDR or CIS.
For details, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual.

Installation Procedure for ISDN-BRI

START

Mounting BRT Card

Page 64

Selection of PLO in
MP Card

Page 57

BRT Cable Connection

via MDF

Page 65

END

63

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Mounting BRT Card

(1)

(2)

Before mounting the BRT (PN-BRTA/PN-2BRTC/PN-2BRTK/PN-4BRTA-A)

card, set the MB switch to UP position, and set the other switches to
appropriate position. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 218, Page 223,
Page 228, Page 233

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Mount the BRT card in the following AP slots of PIM0-PIM7.

PIM0-7: AP00-AP11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU) : AP00-AP10 slots
NOTE 1: The BRT card (BRT0/BRT1), which sends a clock signal to PLO of the MP card, must be
mounted in the AP slots of PIM0.
NOTE 2: Maximum of six PN-4BRTA-A cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards per
system. For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only line/trunk cards can be
mounted in any slot of LT00-LT11 slots of each PIM.
EXAMPLE: When mounting three PN-4BRTA-A cards in PIM0-7
07

08

09

10

11

12
PFT

The same number of slots as

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots:

06

MP/FP

05

MP/AP

4BRT card

04

line/trunk card

4BRT card

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots

03

line/trunk card

02

line/trunk card

01

4BRT card

VM
PIM0-7

00

The rest of slots:

The other application processor cards
and line/trunk cards can be mounted

Only line/trunk
cards can be
mounted

(3)

After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.

64

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

BRT Cable Connection via MDF

Connect the cable to a NT1 equipment via the MDF as shown below.
Location of AP Slots and LTC Connectors for BRT
Page 66
Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT
Page 67

BRT Cable Connection via MDF

For BRT/2BRT/4BRT (AP00-AP07 slot)
BWB

PBX

MDF

BRT

NT1

TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3
CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 1000 m (3280 ft.)

For 4BRT (AP08-AP11 slot)

Connect No. 0 and No. 1 circuit via the LTC connector, and No. 2 and No. 3 via the CN2
connector.

BWB

PBX

CN2 CONNECTOR
(FOR No. 2 AND No. 3 CIRCUIT)
MDF
NT1

BRT

NOTE
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3
CONNECTOR
(FOR No. 0 AND No. 1 CIRCUIT)
MAXIMUM 1000 m (3280 ft.)

NOTE:

Make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-4BRTA-A card.

65

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Location of AP Slots and LTC Connectors for BRT

L
T
0
0
/
A
P
0
0

LTC0
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
MJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
1
/
A
P
0
1

L
T
0
2
/
A
P
0
2

L
T
0
3
/
A
P
0
3

L
T
0
4
/
A
P
0
4

L
T
0
5
/
A
P
0
5

L
T
0
6
/
A
P
0
6

LTC1
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
MN

AP00
SLOT

AP01
SLOT

AP02
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
7
/
A
P
0
7

L
T
0
8
/
A
P
0
8

L
T
0
9
/
A
P
0
9

L
T
1
0
/
A
P
1
0

L
T
1
1
/
A
P
1
1

LTC2
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB

AP03
SLOT

AP04
SLOT

AP05
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

66

RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA
RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LTC3
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB
RB
TB

AP06
SLOT

AP07
SLOT

AP08
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA
TA
RA
TA

RA
TA
RA
TA

RA
TA
RA
TA

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

RB
TB
RB
TB

AP09
SLOT

RB
TB
RB
TB

AP10
SLOT

RB
TB
RB
TB

AP11
SLOT

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT

For BRT
PIM0
LTC1
BRT

MDF

RECEIVE
AP05
RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

TO NT1

TRANSFER

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

44

44

19

20

45

45

20

Continued on next page

67

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT

For 2BRT
PIM0
LTC1
2BRT

No. 0
CIRCUIT

MDF

RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

TO NT1

RECEIVE

AP05
RA

19

19

RA

RB

44

44

RB

TA

20

20

TA

TB

45

45

TB

No. 1
CIRCUIT

TO NT1

TRANSFER

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

RA

44

RB

44

RB

19

RA

20

TA

45

TB

45

TB

20

TA

RA

Continued on next page

68

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT

For 4BRT (AP00-AP07 slot)
PIM0
4BRT

No. 0
CIRCUIT

No. 1
CIRCUIT

LTC1
P

MDF

RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

RA

19

19

RA

RB

44

44

RB

TA

20

20

TA

TB

45

45

TB

RA

21

21

RA

RB

46

46

RB

TA

22

22

TA

TB

47

47

TB

TO NT1

TO NT1

AP05

No. 2
CIRCUIT

No. 3
CIRCUIT

RA

23

23

RECEIVE
RA

RB

48

48

RB

TA

24

24

TA

TB

49

49

TB

TO NT1

TO NT1

TRANSFER

LTC1 (P)

LTC1 (J)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

RA

44

RB

44

RB

19

RA

20

TA

45

TB

45

TB

20

TA

21

RA

46

RB

46

RB

21

RA

22

TA

47

TB

47

TB

22

TA

23

RA

48

RB

48

RB

23

RA

24

TA

49

TB

49

TB

24

TA

Continued on next page

69

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT

For 4BRT (AP08-AP11 slot)
PIM0
LTC1
4BRT

No. 0
CIRCUIT

No. 1
CIRCUIT

AP08
NOTE

MDF

RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

RA

19

19

RA

RB

44

44

RB

TA

20

20

TA

TB

45

45

TB

CN2

TO NT1

TO NT1

1
2

RA

08

TB

RB

07

TA

06

RB

05

RA

RECEIVE

04

TB

RA

03

TA

02

RB

01

RA

TA

No. 3
CIRCUIT

TO NT1

TB

RB
No. 2
CIRCUIT

TA

TO NT1

TB
TRANSFER

NOTE:

Make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-4BRTA-A card.
Continued on next page

70

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-BRI

Example of MDF Cross Connection for BRT

1

LTC CONNECTOR

CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECOR)

LTC1 (J)

CN2

LTC1 (P)

TB
TA
17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

RA

44

RB

44

RB

19

RA

20

TA

45

TB

45

TB

20

TA

RB
RA
TB
TA
RB
RA

71

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

Install the equipment for the ISDN Terminal according to the procedure shown below.

Installation Procedure for ISDN Terminal

START

PN-2ILCC

Type of ILC Card

PN-2ILCA

Mounting ICH Card

Page 73

Mounting ILC Card

Page 74

ILC Cable Connection

via MDF

Page 75

END

72

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

Mounting ICH Card

(1)

Before mounting the ICH (PN-SC03-B) card, set the MB switch to UP

position, and set the other switches to appropriate position.
See CHAPTER 4.
Page 301

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2)

Mount the ICH card in the following AP slots of PIM0-PIM7.

PIM0-7: AP00-AP11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU) : AP00-AP10 slots

(3)

After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.

73

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

Mounting ILC Card

(1)

Confirm the correct switch settings of the ILC (PN-2ILCA/PN-2ILCC) card.

See CHAPTER 4.
Page 307, Page 310
ATTENTION

NOTE:

When using the ILC (2ILCC) card, the ICH (PN-SC03-B) card is not
required.

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2)

Mount the ILC card in the following LT slots of PIM0-PIM7.

PN-2ILCA card
PIM0-7: LT00-LT07 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU): LT00-LT07 slots
PN-2ILCC card
PIM0-7: AP00-AP07 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU): AP00-AP07 slots

(3)

After mounting the card (for PN-2ILCC), set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in
service.

74

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

ILC Cable Connection via MDF

Connect the cable to an ISDN Terminal or a Terminal Adapter (TA) via the MDF as shown below.
Location of LT/AP Slots and LTC Connectors for ILC
Page 76
Example of MDF Cross Connection for ILC
Page 77

ILC Cable Connection via MDF

PBX
(PIM0-PIM7)
BWB
MDF

ILC
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE

Modular
Connector
To ISDN
Terminal

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2 CONNECTOR

Page 35

75

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

Location of LT/AP Slots and LTC Connectors for ILC

L
T
0
0
/
A
P
0
0

LTC0
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

NOTE:

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

MJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
1
/
A
P
0
1

L
T
0
2
/
A
P
0
2

L
T
0
3
/
A
P
0
3

L
T
0
4
/
A
P
0
4

L
T
0
5
/
A
P
0
5

L
T
0
6
/
A
P
0
6

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

MN

LT00/
AP00
SLOT

LT01/
AP01
SLOT

LT02/
AP02
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

L
T
0
8
/
A
P
0
8

L
T
0
9
/
A
P
0
9

L
T
1
0
/
A
P
1
0

L
T
1
1
/
A
P
1
1

LTC2

LTC1
RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

L
T
0
7
/
A
P
0
7

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

LT03/
AP03
SLOT

LT04/
AP04
SLOT

LT05/
AP05
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

RA0
TA0
RA1
TA1

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LTC3
RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

RB0
TB0
RB1
TB1

LT06/
AP06
SLOT

LT07/
AP07
SLOT

LT08/
AP08
SLOT

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LT09/
AP09
SLOT

LT10/
AP10
SLOT

LT11/
AP11
SLOT

Be sure to mount an ILC card on the LTC connector separated from analog line/trunk cards.

76

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR ISDN TERMINAL

Example of MDF Cross Connection for ILC

Modular Connector

2
4 3
7 6 5

1
Pin No.

PIM0
LTC0
ILC

LT00/
AP00

LTC (J)

MDF

RECEIVE

RA0

RA

RB0

26

26

RB

TA0

TA

TB0

27

27

TB

RA1

RB1

28

28

TA1

TB1

29

29

LTC (P)

RA

26

RB

26

RB

RA

TA

27

TB

27

TB

TA

28

28

29

29

3
6
4

SEND

Pin No.
PBX
Direction of Signal
1
Not Used
2
3
RA

4
TA

5
TB

6
RB

7
Not Used
8

77

TO ISDN
TERMINAL

Terminal

TA
RA
RB
TB

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EVENT BASED CCIS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EVENT BASED CCIS

Install the equipment for Event Based CCIS according to the procedure shown below.
NOTE:

For Call Recording of ISDN call, install the equipment for SMDR/CIS.
For details, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual.

Installation Procedure for Event Based CCIS

START

Mounting
DTI and DCH Card/
PRT Card or BRT Card

Page 53
Page 64

DTI/DCH/PRT
BRT

Selection of PLO in
MP Card

Page 57

Mounting CCH Card

Page 79

DTI/PRT/BRT Card Cable

Connection via MDF
or via CONN Card

DTI/PRT
CONN
BRT

Page 58
Page 61
Page 65

END

78

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EVENT BASED CCIS

Mounting CCH Card

(1)

Before mounting the CCH (PN-SC00/PN-DTA/PN-DTB) card, set the MB

switch to UP position, and set the other switches to appropriate position.
See CHAPTER 4.
Page 283, Page 286, Page 292

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2)

Mount the CCH card in the following AP slots.

PIM0-7: AP00-AP11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU) : AP00-AP10 slots

(3)

After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.

79

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/13/2007

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

80

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM DATA
PROGRAMMING

This chapter explains the programming procedure to provide the ISDN feature to the PBX.

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ..............................................

PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING ......................................................
ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING ......................................................
ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING ............................................
ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING .....................................................
ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING ...............................
EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING ...................................

81

82
83
89
104
114
162
164
183

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

In the programming procedure, the meanings of (1), (2) and markings are as follows.
(1)
(2)

:
:
:

1st Data
2nd Data
Initial Data
With the system data clear command (CM00, CM01), the data with this marking is automatically assigned for each command.
:

System Initialization
A reset of the MP card is required after data setting.
Press SW1 switch on the MP card.

DTI INITIAL

DTI Initialization
A reset of the DTI/PRT card is required after data setting.
Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then Down.

DCH INITIAL

DCH Initialization
A reset of the DCH card is required after data setting.
Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then Down.

BRT INITIAL

BRT Initialization
A reset of the BRT card is required after data setting.
Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then Down.

ICH INITIAL

ICH Initialization
A reset of the ICH card is required after data setting.
Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then Down.

OFF LINE

Off Line
Command with this marking can be used only under Off-Line mode of the MP
card.
To set Off-Line mode,
(1) Set SW3 on the MP card to 2 or 3.
(2) Press SW1 on the MP card.

INITIAL

82

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
System Data Backup

CAUTION
If you operate as follows without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as Call Forwarding and Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing] from a station), the data that has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initialization (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
Do not reset the MP card while SYSD lamp on the MP card is flashing.

83

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

Office Data Conversion

When upgrading the software of the system from Series 3300 or before to Series 3400 or later, the office
data conversion by CM00>90 is required. The office data that has been converted and the office data in
Series 3400 software or later are incompatible with the software of Series 3300 or before. We recommend
to execute the system data backup before the office data conversion.
NOTE:

START
CM00

When upgrading the software in Retrofit system to Series 3400 or later, convert the office data
using Office Data Converter in the MATWorX CD-ROM and then execute the office data
conversion by CM00>90.
DESCRIPTION

DATA

Execute the office data conversion.

[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
OFF LINE

(1) 90
(2) 0: Start conversion
1: Always displayed after first data 90 is
typed NOTE 1

NOTE 1: When first data 90 is typed, second data 1 is displayed. Also while converting the
office data, 1 is displayed.
NOTE 2: There is no problem even if the office data conversion is executed repeatedly.
END

84

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

LEN Assignment by CM14

For the setting of LEN by CM14, the range of the FP/AP number that must be assigned to the 1st data of
CM14 is valid by the software version you use.
Assign the correct FP/AP number to each FP/AP, referring to the tables below.
[For Series 3200 R6.1 software or before]
: Available : Not available

FP/AP No.
00

01-03

04-15

16-19

20-31

32-59

60-63

FP card (PN-CP15)

MP built-in FP

DAIA/DAID card

Virtual FP for DtermIP

AP card

Virtual AP (Virtual IPT)

FP/AP TYPE

[For Series 3200 R6.2 software]

: Available : Not available

FP/AP No.
00

01-03

04-15

16-19

20-31

32-59

60-63

FP card (PN-CP15)

MP built-in FP

Virtual FP for DtermIP

AP card

Virtual AP (Virtual IPT)

FP/AP TYPE

85

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

[For Series 3300 software]

/: Available NOTE : Not available

FP/AP No.
00

01-03

04-15

16-19

20-31

32-59

60-63

FP card (PN-CP15)

MP built-in FP

Virtual FP for DtermIP

AP card

Virtual AP (Virtual IPT/

Virtual CSH [For PHS])

Virtual FP for PS Station

FP/AP TYPE

NOTE:

Although FP/AP number marked with is available to use, we recommend FP/AP number
marked with .

86

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

[For Series 3400 software or later]

/: Available NOTE 1 : Not available

FP/AP No.
00

01-03

04-15

16-19

20-31

32-59

60-63

FP card (PN-CP15)

MP built-in FP

Virtual FP for DtermIP

AP card

Virtual AP (Virtual IPT/

Virtual CSH for IP-CS
[For PHS]/Virtual CSH for
WLAN)
NOTE 3

Virtual FP for PS Station/

Virtual FP for WLAN Station
NOTE 3

NOTE 2

FP/AP TYPE

NOTE 1: Although FP/AP number marked with is available to use, we recommend FP/AP number
marked with .
NOTE 2: We recommend the setting of the FP number (60-63), when providing 256 PS stations/WLAN
stations or less and setting of the FP number (56-63), when providing 257 PS stations/WLAN
stations or more.
NOTE 3: Virtual CSH for WLAN and Virtual FP for WLAN Station are available for Series 3500 software
or later.

87

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTIONS

Trunk Number Assignment

When assigning the trunk number with commands as shown in the following table, the range of the trunk
number that can be assigned is valid by the software version you use.

AVAILABLE RANGE OF TRUNK NUMBER

COMMAND CODE
First data of CM30

Series 3700 R12.2 or

before
000-255

Series 3800 or later

000-511 NOTE

Second data of CM07/CMA9

NOTE:

Assign the trunk number 256-511 only when accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site.

AP Number Assignment
When using Series 3800 software or later in the system, AP numbers 64-93 (for the expanded PRT card)
can be assigned by the following commands. However, AP numbers 64-93 are available only when accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site.
Second data of CM06
First data of CMAA

88

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING
Digital Trunk Data Assignment
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM05

Assign an AP number to the DTI/PRT card.

The AP number must match the SENSE switch
setting on the DTI/PRT card.
INITIAL

Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No.
(2) 09: DTI card
12: PRT card

Specify the AP highway channel for 24DTI/

30DTI/24PRT/30PRT card.
INITIAL

Y=1
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No.
(2) 0 : Use Expanded Highway channel
(128 time slots)
1 : Use Basic Highway channel
(128 time slots)

Assign an Remote Site number that accommodates AP cards to the AP number assigned by
CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL

Y=8
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No.
(2) XX 99
XX 9931 (for AP No. 64-93)
[Series 3800 software or later]
NOTE 2
XX
: 01-30: Remote Site No. 01-30
NOTE 3
NONE : No data

NOTE 1: Set this command only when accommodating the PRT card in Remote
Site.
NOTE 2: When accommodating the PRT card
in Remote Site with AP numbers 6493 (for the expanded PRT card), be
sure to set the switch number of all
the PRT cards accommodated with
the SENSE switch/SW1-4 to 31, and
to assign any one number from AP
numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT
card (same even if the site that accommodates the PRT card is different).
NOTE 3: When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or Series 3300 software, Remote Site No. 01-15 can be
assigned.
A

89

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM05

Assign the accommodation type of the Remote

Site to the AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
NOTE:

CM07

DATA

Only when accommodating the PRT

card in Remote Site, set the second
data to 1 (remote site) to the AP
number assigned by CM05 Y=0.

Assign trunk numbers to each channel number

on the DTI/PRT card.
INITIAL
The system allocates time slots to consecutive
channels from lowest to highest channel number assigned. To minimize the number of time
slots allocated, assign trunk numbers to the
consecutive channels on each card.
Never skip channels in CM07.

CM48

Y=6
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No.
(2) 1 : Remote Site
3 : AP card

Allow second Dial Tone when dialing access

code assigned by CM20 for ISDN B channel
route.

Y=01
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned
by CM05
ZZ : 00-22: B channel No. of 24DTI/
24PRT
23: D channel No. of 24DTI/
24PRT
ZZ : 01-15, 17-31: B channel No. of
30DTI/30PRT
16: D channel No. of
30DTI/30PRT
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.
Any trunk No. already assigned by CM10/
CM14 cannot be used.
Y=2
(1) 04
(2) 0 : For ISDN trunk route, 2nd Dial Tone
is provided.
1 : No 2nd Dial Tone

90

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

B
CMAA

DATA

Specify the type of PRT card.

Y=15
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 0 : PN-30PRTA/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
(30PRT)
1 : PN-24PRTA/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
(24PRT)

Specify the A-law/-law setting of PN-DTB

(PRT) card.
[For Taiwan]
[Series 3900 software required]

Y=17
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 0 : A-law
1 : -law
3 : Depends on CM04 Y=10>00

NOTE:

When providing A-law/-law conversion for PRT in Taiwan, assign

the second data of CMAA Y=17 to 0/
1 (A-law/-law) and set the SW3-3
of PN-DTB card to ON.

Assign the necessary functions to the DTI/PRT

card. CMAA Y=00/01/02 assignment is required only for 24DTI/24PRT.
DTI INITIAL

Y=00 Data Mode

(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 0: Based on AT&T Spec.

After entering the data, set the MB switch on

the DTI/PRT card to UP, and then to DOWN,
for DTI/PRT initialization.

Y=01 Frame Configuration

(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 0 : 12-Multi Frame
1 : 24-Multi Frame

NOTE:

The following table shows the relationship between CMAA Y=01 and
Y=02.

CMAA Y=01
(FRAME CONFIGURATION)

CMAA Y=02
(ZERO CODE
SUPPRESSION)

24-Multi Frame [1]

12-Multi Frame [0]

SIGNALING

B8ZS
Not available [1]

Transparent

Available [0]

B7

[ ]: Indicates 2nd data

Y=02 Zero Code Suppression

(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available
Y=03
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. assigned by
CM05
(2) 7 : Associated Channel
Interoffice Signaling

91

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM30

Assign a trunk route number to each ISDN

trunk used for voice channel and also to signaling channel. The DTI route must be separated
from any analog trunk route.

Y=00
(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign the trunk data to each ISDN incoming

trunk used for voice channel only.

(1)

NOTE 1: For ISDN Indial programming, see

DID Addressing.
Page 117
NOTE 2: For Event Based CCIS, only trunk
numbers 000-255 are available.

Assign Circuit Identification Code (CIC) to

each ISDN trunk used for voice channel only.
NOTE:

CIC must not be assigned to the

trunk No. of D channel: TS16
(30DTI/30PRT) or TS23 (24DTI/
24PRT).

Y=02 Day Mode

Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination
09: Automated Attendant
14: Termination to Attendant console
16: Remote Access to System (DISA)
18: ISDN Indial
Y=07
(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01
(2) 000-029: CIC

EXAMPLE OF 30DTI/30PRT
B channel trunk No.: D100-D114, D116-D130
D channel trunk No.: D115
(1) 100-114, 116-130
(2) 000-014, 015-029
EXAMPLE OF 24DTI/24PRT
B channel trunk No.: D100-D122
D channel trunk No.: D123
(1) 100-122
(2) 000-022
D

92

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Assign trunk route data to the trunk route number assigned by CM30 Y=00.
NOTE 1: This data should be assigned to the
B channel trunk route. For D channel trunk route, no data setting is required.
NOTE 2: This data should be assigned to both
B channel trunk route and D channel trunk route.

Y=00 Kind of Trunk Route NOTE 2

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: ISDN Trunk
(1) 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Not used
Y=02 Call Direction NOTE 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : Bothway Trunk
Y=04 Answer Signal from distant office
NOTE 2
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives (ISDN Trunk)
(1) 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 7 : Not used
Y=05
Release Signal from distant office
NOTE 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives
Y=09 Incoming Connection Signaling
NOTE 2
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 08: ISDN
(1) 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Not used
Y=11 Toll Restriction NOTE 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
3 : Not provided

93

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

E
CM35

NOTE:

DATA

This data should be assigned to the

B channel trunk route. For D channel trunk route, no data setting is
required.

Y=14 SMDR for outgoing call NOTE

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide
Y=15 Kind of Call Termination Indicator
Key/Lamp on ATT NOTE
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
Y=16
Hooking Signal Sending to outside NOTE
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not sending
Y=19 NOTE
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-3 : Programmable PAD
(See CM42)
4-7 : Fixed PAD
NOTE:

For details of PAD data, refer to

Command Manual.

94

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

NOTE 1: This data should be assigned to the

B channel trunk route. For D channel trunk route, no data setting is required.
NOTE 2: This data should be assigned to both
B channel trunk route and D channel trunk route.

Y=28 Outgoing Trunk Queuing NOTE 1

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Restricted
Y=39 Trunk release by detection of reversal of tip and ring NOTE 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : To release
Y=89 CRC error check NOTE 2
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
(1) 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
Y=90 Assignment of DTI route for ISDN
NOTE 2
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3: ISDN-Primary Rate Interface
(1) 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3: ISDN-Primary Rate Interface

Allow sending extension information of Low

layer Compatibility (LLC) information element, to each trunk route.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Y=130
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Allow
Y=143 Sending method of CCIS channel
No. for Event Based CCIS
NOTE 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : By Subaddress
1 : By dialed-in digits

95

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
NOTE:

DATA

When sending the in-band tone to

the calling station from ISDN, set
the second data to 1.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the calling station receives the in-band tone or when the
calling station goes on-hook.

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an incoming call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
NOTE:

Y=158
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To release
1 : Not released

Y=208
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not released
1 : To release

When sending the in-band tone to

the called station from ISDN, set the
second data to 0.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the called station receives
the in-band tone or when the called
station goes on-hook.

Specify whether the ISDN trunk tone is sent

when the ISDN trunk is seized.
[Series 3400 software required]

Y=200
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

96

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

For originating calls to the ISDN, do the following programming.

H

DESCRIPTION

CM20

Assign ISDN access code to each trunk route

assigned by CM30 Y=00.
NOTE:

DATA
Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access code
(2) 100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

LCR can be used with ISDN-PRI.

Refer to Feature Programming
Manual.

CM08

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from an attendant.

(1) 403
(2) 0 : Not available
1 : Available

CM41

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from a Single Line Telephone (PB/DP),
Dterm or Attendant Console, if required.

Y=0
(1) 50
(2) 03-14: 3-14 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.
Recommended setting is 05 (5 seconds).

NOTE:

A # or timing start is used for outgoing ISDN calls when LCR is not invoked.
Example: 1-214-555-1212 is dialed from a Dterm. The PBX will access a bearer channel
and ship the digits only after the timing start timer has expired or # is dialed by the caller.
The # sign tells the PBX that dialing is completed.

97

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

I
CM8A

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the Type of Number of Called Party

Number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 157: Type of Number of Called Party No.
(for E.164)
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: International Number
02
: National Number
04
: Subscriber Number
NONE : Unknown
(1) 157: Type of Number of Called Party No.
(for Private Numbering Plan)
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: Level 2 Regional Number
02
: Level 1 Regional Number
03
: PSTN Specific Number
04
: Local Number
06
: Abbreviated Number
NONE : Unknown

Assign the Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier.

Y=5000-5255
LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: ISDN/Telephone Numbering
Plan
03
: Data Numbering Plan
04
: Telex Numbering Plan
08
: National Numbering Plan
09
: Private Numbering Plan
NONE : Unknown

98

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

When providing Tandem Connection (ODT/DTI to ISDN, ISDN to ODT/DTI), do the following programming.
J

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes

allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM41

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from a station (PB/DP telephone/Dterm) or
Attendant Console for the Tandem Connection.

Y=0
(1) 57
(2) 03-14: 3-14 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.

NOTE 1: By using CM41 Y=0>57, an ISDN call is available even if # is not dialed.
NOTE 2: CM41 Y=0>57 is effective for dialing a called number. When dialing a called party subaddress, this command is not effective.
K

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to CCIS, CCIS to ISDN), do the following programming.
K

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM08

Allow tandem connection by station or attendant.

(1) 028
(2) 0: Available

99

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to ISDN), do the following programming.

[Series 3600 software required]
L

DESCRIPTION

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM08

Allow tandem connection by station or attendant.

(1) 028
(2) 0: Available

CM35

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving

the ISDN DISCONNECT message with
Progress Description=8 from ISDN because
the called party is busy in tandem connection
(ISDN to ISDN).

Y=233
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

NOTE:

DATA

To release the ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message,
set the second data 0 to the incoming
trunk route of tandem office.

Provide relay of the ALERT message to the

calling party in tandem connection (ISDN to
ISDN).
NOTE:

Y=266
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

This command should be set to both

incoming trunk route and outgoing
trunk route of tandem office.

END

100

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

D Channel Handler Assignment

START

DESCRIPTION

CM05

When you use the DCH card (PN-SC01), assign an AP number to the DCH card.
The AP number must match the SENS switch
settings on the DCH card.
INITIAL
NOTE:

CMAA

DATA
Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 12: PN-SC01 (DCH)

When you use the PRT card, skip

this assignment, since the PRT AP
number has been assigned on
Page 89.

Select DCH for ISDN-PRI.

Y=14
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. of DCH/PRT
card assigned by
CM05
(2) 0 : PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-DTA/
PN-DTB (Built-in DCH)
1 : PN-SC01 (DCH)

101

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAA

Assign the ISDN Protocol Type for DCH/PRT

card.
DTI INITIAL

Y=06
(1) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. of DCH/PRT
card assigned by
CM05
(2) ISDN Protocol Type
17 : Australia
18 : New Zealand
19 : ITU-T (Hong Kong)
20 : AT&T (#4, #5 ESS)
21 : NTI (DMS 100, 250)
22 : Australia ETSI
23 : ETSI VN4 (Chile)
24 : ETSI Standard (Brazil, Chile, Columbia, UAE)
25 : ITU-T Standard (Thailand)
28 : USA NI-2
30 : ETSI-2 (Latin America/Europe)
31 : Germany
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
32 : Netherlands
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]/
Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/
Sweden
[Series 3500 software required]
[For EU]
33 : Italy
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
34 : ETSI (Huawei)
[Series 3300 software required]
[For China]
63 : Not used

DCH INITIAL

102

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM06

Assign the DCH number to the AP number of

DCH/PRT card assigned by CM05.
INITIAL

Y=08
(1) 0-7 : DCH No.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
00-31 : DCH No.
[Series 3800 software required]
(2) 04-15, 20-31, 64-93: AP No. of DCH/PRT
card assigned by
CM05
NONE : No data

CM35

Assign the DCH number to the each B channel

trunk route assigned by CM30 Y=00.

Y=93
Assignment of D Channel Handler
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: DCH No. assigned by CM06
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
00-31: DCH No. assigned by CM06
[Series 3800 software required]
15 : No data
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
NONE : No data
[Series 3800 software required]

CMA9

Assign the DTI/PRT trunk number assigned by

CM07 Y=01 to each DCH number for providing D channel path between DTI/PRT and
DCH.
DCH INITIAL

Y=00
(1) 0-7: DCH No. assigned by CM06
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
(2) 00-31: DCH No. assigned by CM06
[Series 3800 software required]
000-511 : DTI/PRT Trunk No. assigned by
CM07 Y=01
NONE : No data

END

103

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING
BRT Assignment
START

DESCRIPTION

CM05

Assign an AP number to the BRT card.

The AP number must match the SENSE switch
setting on the BRT card.
INITIAL
NOTE:

DATA
Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 10: BRT card

The AP number 20-31 cannot be set

to the PN-BRTA card.

Specify the AP highway channel for PN4BRTA-A card.

INITIAL

Y=1
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 0 : Use Expanded Highway channel
(128 time slots)
1 : Use Basic Highway channel
(128 time slots)

Assign an Remote Site number that accommodates AP cards to the AP number assigned by
CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL

Y=8
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) XX 99
XX: 01-15: Remote Site No. 01-15
[Series 3200 R6.2 software or
Series 3300 software required]
01-30: Remote Site No. 01-30
[Series 3400 software required]
NONE : No data

Assign the accommodation type of the Remote

Site to the AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL

Y=6
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 1 : Remote Site
3 : AP card

NOTE:

Only when accommodating the BRT

card in Remote Site, set the second
data to 1 (remote site) to the AP
number assigned by CM05 Y=0.

104

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAA

Assign the ISDN Protocol Type for DCH circuit on the BRT card.
BRT INITIAL

Y=06
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of BRT assigned by
CM05
(2) ISDN Protocol Type
17 : Australia
18 : New Zealand
20 : AT&T (#4, #5 ESS)
21 : NTI (DMS 100, 250)
22 : Australia ETSI
24 : ETSI Standard (Brazil, Columbia,
Indonesia, UAE)
25 : ITU-T Standard (Thailand)
27 : USA NI-1
28 : USA NI-2
31 : Germany
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
32 : Netherlands
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]/
Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/
Sweden
[Series 3500 software required]
[For EU]
33 : Italy
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
63 : Not used

CM07

Assign ISDN trunk number to each channel

number of BRT.
INITIAL

Y=02
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 04-15, 20-31: AP No. assigned by
CM05
ZZ : B channel No. (00/01: BRT)
(00-03: 2BRT)
(00-07: 4BRT)
(2) D000-D255: Trunk No.
Trunk No. already assigned
by CM10/CM14 cannot to be
used.

NOTE:

Be sure to assign the trunk numbers

to all circuits (00-03 of the 2BRT
card, 00-07 of the 4BRT card), even
if only one PCM digital line is accommodated to the 2BRT card or
less than four PCM digital lines are
accommodated to the 4BRT card.
Set make-busy to the unused trunk
numbers by CME5 Y=1, 2nd data=0.

B
105

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM30

Assign trunk route to each ISDN trunk used for

voice channel (B channel).
NOTE:

DATA

BRT route must be separated from

analog trunk routes.

Assign the trunk data to each ISDN incoming

trunk used for voice channel only.
NOTE:

CM35

If CM35 Y=143 is set to 1 for

Event Based CCIS, this command
must be set to 18 (ISDN Indial).
For ISDN Indial programming, see
DID Addressing.
Page 117

Y=00
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route

(1)

Y=02 Day Mode

Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination
09: Automated Attendant
14: Termination to Attendant Console
16: Remote Access to System (DISA)
18: ISDN Indial

Assign an ISDN subscriber number (last 4 digits of telephone number) to each ISDN trunk.

Y=19
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

Assign ISDN Local Office Code Table number

to each ISDN trunk.

Y=34
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) 00-14: Local Office Table No.
15 : Not assigned

Assign trunk route data to the trunk route number assigned by CM30 Y=00.

Y=00 Kind of Trunk Route

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: ISDN Trunk
Y=02 Call Direction
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : Bothway Trunk
Y=04 Answer Signal from distant office
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives (ISDN Trunk)

106

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=05 Release signal from distant office
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM35

Y=09 Incoming Connection Signaling

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 08: ISDN Indial
Y=11 Toll Restriction
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
3 : Not provided
Y=14 SMDR for outgoing call
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide
Y=15 Kind of Call Termination Indicator
Key/Lamp on ATT
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
Y=16
Hooking Signal Sending to outside
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not sending
Y=19
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-3 : Programmable PAD
(See CM42)
4-7 : Fixed PAD
NOTE:

For details of PAD data, refer to

Command Manual.

Y=28 Outgoing Trunk Queuing

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Restricted
D

107

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=39 Trunk release by detection of reversal of tip and ring
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : To release

CM35

NOTE:

We recommend the point-to-point

connection when connecting the system to the public network using the
BRT card. For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT
card, when the system is established
far from the public network, the
communication error occurs easily
because the ISDN signal fades
away.

Y=79 Terminal connection form for ISDN

Basic Rate Interface
BRT INITIAL
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Point-to-Point
1 : Point-to-Multipoint

Y=90 Assignment of BRT route for ISDN

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: ISDN-Basic Rate Interface
Allow sending extension information of Low
layer Compatibility (LLC) information element, to each trunk route.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Y=130
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Allow

Specify the method of Layer 1 activation.

BRT INITIAL
Y=144
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Activated by call event
1 : Always activated

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Y=158
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To release
1 : Not released

NOTE:

When sending the in-band tone to

the calling station from ISDN, set
the second data to 1.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the calling station receives the in-band tone or when the
calling station goes on-hook.

E
108

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Assign the method of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignments for the Trunk number.
[Series 3800 software required]
BRT INITIAL
NOTE:

DATA

Automatic TEI assignment (set the

second data to 0) is available only
when second data of CM35 Y=79 is
set to 1 (Point-to-Multipoint connection).

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an incoming call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
NOTE:

Y=283
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Automatic TEI Assignment
(TEI: 64-126)
1 : Non-Automatic TEI Assignment
(TEI: 0 fixed)

Y=208
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not released
1 : To release

When sending the in-band tone to

the called station from ISDN, set the
second data to 0.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the called station receives
the in-band tone or when the called
station goes on-hook.

Specify whether the ISDN trunk tone is sent

when the ISDN trunk is seized.
[Series 3400 software required]

Y=200
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

CM50

Assign ISDN Local Office Code.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: Local Office Table No. assigned by
CM30 Y=34
(2) X....X
(Maximum 12 digits)

CMAC

Assign Service Profile ID (SPID) to each B

channel number.
[North America Only]
INITIAL

Y=30
(1) XX Z
XX: 04-15, 20-31: AP No. assigned by
CM05
Z : 0-7: B channel No.
(2) XXXX ZZZZ
XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.
ZZZZ : SPID

109

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

For originating calls to the ISDN network, do the following programming.

F

DESCRIPTION

CM20

Assign ISDN access code to each trunk route

assigned by CM30 Y=00.
NOTE:

DATA
Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access code
(2) 100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

LCR can be used with ISDN-BRI.

Refer to Feature Programming
Manual.

CM08

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from an attendant.

(1) 403
(2) 0 : Not available
1 : Available

CM41

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from a Single Line Telephone (PB/DP),
Dterm or Attendant Console, if required.

Y=0
(1) 50
(2) 03-14: 3-14 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.
(Dialing terminated by entering #.)
Recommended setting is 05 (5 seconds).

NOTE:

CM8A

A # or timing start is used for outgoing ISDN calls when LCR is not invoked.
Example: 1-214-555-1212 is dialed from a Dterm. The PBX will access a bearer channel
and ship the digits only after the timing start timer has expired or # is dialed by the caller.
The # sign tells the PBX that dialing is completed.

Assign the Type of Number of Called Party

Number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 157: Type of Number of Called Party No.
(for E.164)
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: International Number
02
: National Number
04
: Subscriber Number
NONE : Unknown
(1) 157: Type of Number of Called Party No.
(for Private Numbering Plan)
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: Level 2 Regional Number
02
: Level 1 Regional Number
03
: PSTN Specific Number
04
: Local Number
06
: Abbreviated Number
NONE : Unknown

110

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM8A

Assign the Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier.

Y=5000-5255
LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: ISDN/Telephone Numbering
Plan
03
: Data Numbering Plan
04
: Telex Numbering Plan
08
: National Numbering Plan
09
: Private Numbering Plan
NONE : Unknown

When providing Tandem Connection (COT/ODT/LDT/DTI to ISDN, ISDN to COT/ODT/LDT/

DTI), do the following programming.
H

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Specify whether the busy tone is sent to a calling party of ISDN when a called party is busy
in the tandem connection (ISDN to COT).

(1) 407
(2) 0 : Available (BT)
1 : Not available (RBT)

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM41

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN

call from a station (PB/DP telephone Dterm) or
Attendant Console for the Tandem Connection.

Y=0
(1) 57
(2) 03-14: 3-14 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.

NOTE 1: By using CM41 Y=0>57, an ISDN call is available even if # is not dialed.
NOTE 2: CM41 Y=0>57 is effective for dialing a called number. When dialing a called party subaddress, this command is not effective.
I

111

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to CCIS, CCIS to ISDN), do the following programming.
I

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM08

Allow tandem connection by station or attendant.

(1) 028
(2) 0: Available

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to ISDN), do the following programming.

[Series 3600 software required]
J

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CM08

Allow tandem connection by station or attendant.

(1) 028
(2) 0: Available

112

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving

the ISDN DISCONNECT message with
Progress Description=8 from ISDN because
the called party is busy in tandem connection
(ISDN to ISDN).
NOTE:

DATA

To release the ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message,
set the second data 0 to the incoming
trunk route of tandem office.

Provide relay of the ALERT message to the

calling party in tandem connection (ISDN to
ISDN).
NOTE:

Y=233
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

Y=266
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

This command should be set to both

incoming trunk route and outgoing
trunk route of tandem office.

END

Specify whether the Calling Party Number (CPN) sent from ISDN is sent to the CCIS network.
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Maximum number of digits sent to CCIS network.

(1) 379
(2) 0: 24 digits

CMA7

Activate IAI2 message for sending ISDN CPN

to CCIS network.

Y=26
(1) 0-7: CCIS Channel No.
(2) 0: Active

Allow sending of CPN to CCIS network.

Y=28
(1) 0-7: CCIS Channel No.
(2) 0: Allowed

END

113

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Calling Party Recognition Service (Direct-In Termination (DIT))
Refer to Direct Inward Termination (DIT) in the Feature Programming Manual.
CLI Transparency
Page 115
DID Addressing
Page 117

MEGACOM Access [North America Only]

Page 121

MEGACOM 800 Service [North America Only]

Refer to DID Addressing for programming instructions.
Page 117
SID to Network-Present [Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]
Page 122
CPN to Network-Present [North America]
Page 122
SID to Terminating User-Display [Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]
Page 128
CPN to Terminating User-Display [North America]
Page 131
Subaddress-Present
Page 133
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
Page 134
ISDN PRI Call By Call Service Selection [North America Only]
Page 135
Advice of Charge-Display [Australia/France/Germany/Netherlands/Italy/Greece/
Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/Sweden]
[ITU-T (UAE) Only]
Page 141
Alternate Routing for ISDN [Australia Only]
Page 143
Centrex SHF over ISDN [New Zealand Only]
Page 144
ETSI ISDN Overlap Sending [For EU]
Page 145
ETSI ISDN Overlap Receiving [For EU]
Page 148
ETSI ISDN Addressing [For EU]
Page 153
ETSI ISDN Channel Negotiation [For EU]
Page 156
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)/Connected Line Identification Restriction
(COLR) [For EU]
Page 157
Malicious Call Trace [Australia Only]
Page 159
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) [For EU]
Page 160

114

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

CLI Transparency

a: Tandem Connection between ISDN trunks.

[For EU]
[Series 3800 software required]

ISDN
PBX
Incoming

Outgoing

Receive 214-555-5001.

Send 214-555-5001 as
CPN to the ISDN
network.

CALLING PARTY No.

Relaying CPN

b: Tandem Connection between CCIS and ISDN trunk.

PBX

ISDN
PBX

Incoming

Outgoing
Send 214-555-5001 as
CPN to the ISDN
network.
Relaying CPN

Receive 214-555-5001
from CCIS.
CALLING PARTY No.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Provide Calling Party Number relaying in

ISDN to ISDN/CCIS to ISDN connection for
incoming trunk route.

Y=281
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

NOTE 1: This command must be set for incoming trunk route.

NOTE 2: Calling Party Number relaying in
ISDN tandem connection is available when both CM35 Y=281 and
Y=282 are set to 0.
A

115

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Provide Calling Party Number relaying in

ISDN to ISDN/CCIS to ISDN connection for
outgoing trunk route.

Y=282
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

NOTE 1: This command must be set for outgoing trunk route.

NOTE 2: Calling Party Number relaying in
ISDN tandem connection is available when both CM35 Y=281 and
Y=282 are set to 0.
Specify the Screening Indicator for outgoing
trunk route.

Y=265
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: User-provided, Not screened

Specify the Type of Number for outgoing trunk

route.

Y=230
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 01: International Number
02: National Number

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for

outgoing trunk route.

Y=231
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 01: ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan

Provide the Type of Number/Numbering Plan

Identification of CPN for outgoing trunk route.

Y=234
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

116

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DID Addressing
PBX

Calling
Party

TRK
ISDN
555-9676
555-9677
555-9677

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM30

Assign the data for DID to the trunk numbers

assigned by CM07.

(1)

CM35

Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

Y=00 Kind of Trunk

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DID

Y=02 Day Mode

Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) 18: ISDN Indial

Y=02 OG/IC
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : Bothway Trunk
Y=05 Release Signal Condition
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives
Y=09 Incoming Connection Signaling
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 08: ISDN
A

117

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM51

Assign the destination of DID Call transferred

when the station is busy/unassigned/no answer.

(1)
(2)

Y=00 No Answer
Y=03 Busy
Y=06 Unassigned
00-63: Tenant No.
Destination:
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant Console
EBXXX: Announcement Service:
Digital Announcement Trunk No.
set by CM10/CM14

118

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

To provide DID Digit Conversion:

DESCRIPTION

B
CM35

DATA

Assign the data for DID Digit Conversion to

the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

Y=18 Digit Conversion on DID call

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide
Y=170 Development Table
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Development Table 1
3 : Development Table 0

NOTE:

If CM35 Y=143 is set to 1 for

Event Based CCIS, the number of
digits received on DID must be assigned.

Y=12 Number of digits to be received

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 1 digit
1 : 2 digits
2 : 3 digits
3 : 4 digits
Y=78 Number of digits to be converted for
Development Table 0
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Leading 2-4 digits
1 : All digits of DID are converted by
CM76
Y=171 Number of digits to be converted
for Development Table 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 01-08: 1-8 digits
15 : 4 digits

119

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM76

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 0.

Y=00
(1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 1.

Y=90
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the data for interpreting the digits received.

(1)

Y=01 Day Mode

Y=02 Night Mode
Y=03 Mode A
Y=04 Mode B
000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be terminated
DXX: Change terminating system to:
D04: Direct-In Termination
D14: Attendant Console

END

120

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

MEGACOM Access
[North America Only]
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign the Trunk Restriction Class to each station.

Y=01 Trunk Restriction Class

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X Z
X: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day
mode
Z: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night
mode
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

CM35

Set the outgoing/incoming Trunk Route Restriction data by Trunk Restriction Classes
(RCA-RCH).

(1)
(2)

NOTE:

Y=51-58 Outgoing Trunk Restriction

Y=61-68 Incoming Trunk Restriction
00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
0 : Restricted
1 : Allowed

If Call-By-Call Service Selection is required, see

ming.

Page 135 for additional program-

END

In addition to the programming of Direct Outward Dialing, assign WATS line to the required trunk route,
as shown below.
START
CM35

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign a WATS line to the required trunk

route.

Y=00
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 02: WATS line

END

121

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

SID to Network-Present

DIAL 516-555-4210#

[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]

PBX
TRK

CPN to Network-Present

(214-555-5000)

[North America]

ISDN
4210

(214-555-5001)

For providing the Calling Party Number (CPN) to

the network, do the following programming.

(214-555-5002)

516-555-4210
+214-555-5000
CALLING PARTY No.

CALLING PARTY No.

When Dial-In service is provided:

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN

Local Office Code Table number to required
stations. NOTE 1

Y=12
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.
Y=13
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14

CM13

Specify the facility control of CPN (Calling

Party Number).

Y=25
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To provide
NOTE 2
1 : Not provided

CM50

Assign ISDN Local Office Code to the Table

number assigned by CM12 Y=13.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
(2) X...X: Local Office Code
(Maximum 12 digits)

END

When ISDN (BRI) Terminals are used:

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Allow the ISDN Terminal to send the CPN to

network without using PBX programming.

(1) 434
(2) 0 : CPN set in ISDN Terminal
1 : CPN assigned by CM12 Y=12, 13

END

122

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

NOTE 1: The ISDN number consists of the following numbers.

ISDN number: XXXXXXXXXXXX YYYY
ISDN subscriber No. assigned by CM12 Y=12
(1-4 digits)
ISDN Local Office Code assigned by CM50
Y=05 (1-12 digits)
This number must be in the indial range assigned by Telecom for the ISDN line.
For example:
National Destination Code for Dallas: 214
Local Code for a station: 518-5000
In this case, the ISDN Number is
National Destination Code + Local Code=214518-5000
That is
ISDN Subscribers No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 is 5000.
ISDN Local Office Code assigned by CM50 Y=05 is 214518.
NOTE 2: The following facility control services for CPN are available in accordance with the subscription category of distant ISDN exchange. In case of no subscription, SID (CPN) to NetworkPresent is not available.
Example:

CM13 Y=25

1st Data

2nd Data

Meaning

5000

Restrict transfer

5001

Permit transfer

Station 5000 places an outgoing call to an ISDN subscriber. Because CM13>25 is set to 0, the
ISDN network is instructed to not send 214-518-5000 (see NOTE 1 above) to the distant ISDN
subscriber.
Station 5001 places an outgoing call to an ISDN subscriber, and 214-518-5001 is sent to the
called party.

123

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

NOTE 3: When transferring to an ISDN line after a C.O. incoming call is terminated, the calling number
of the call forwarding station is notified to the ISDN line.
Priority of the calling number that is notified is as follows.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]

CALLING NUMBER
(OFFICE DATA SETTING)

CALLING NUMBER THAT IS

NOTIFIED

CM12 Y=12, 13, CM50 Y=05

ISDN subscriber number is available

Calling number per station

CM30 Y=19, 34, CM50 Y=05

ISDN subscriber number is available

Calling number per trunk

No data

No data

124

PRIORITY
High

Low

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

When Dial-In service is not provided:

DIAL 516-555-4210#
PBX

CALLING PARTY No.

(214-555-5000)
TRK
ISDN
555-4210
516-555-4210
#214-555-5000
CALLING PARTY No.

START

DESCRIPTION

CM13

Specify the sending out of Calling Party Number (CPN).

Y=25
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To send
NOTE 2 on
1 : Not sent
Page 123

CM30

Assign an ISDN subscriber number to each

ISDN trunk.
NOTE 1 on
Page 123

Y=19
(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

Assign ISDN Local Office Code Table number

to each ISDN trunk.

Y=34
(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) 00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-14

Assign ISDN Local Office Code to the Table

number assigned by CM30 Y=34.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
(2) X...X: Local Office Code
(Maximum 12 digits)

CM50

DATA

END

125

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

To provide the specifications of Calling Party Number (CPN), do the following programming in
addition to the programming of When Dial-In service is provided/When Dial-In service is not
provided.
START

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Specify whether the Type of Number/Numbering Plan Identification of CPN is provided, or

not.
[Series 3500 software required]
NOTE:

DATA
Y=234
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

If this data is set to 1, the setting

data of CM35 Y=230/231 is invalid.

Specify the Type of Number for outgoing call.

Y=230
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: International Number
02
: National Number
03
: Network Specific Number
04
: Subscriber Number
06
: Abbreviated Number
NONE : No data

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for

outgoing call.

Y=231
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: ISDN/Telephony Numbering
Plan
03
: Data Numbering Plan
04
: Telex Numbering Plan
08
: National Standard Numbering
Plan
09
: Private Numbering Plan
NONE : No data

Specify the Screening Indicator for outgoing

call.
[Series 3500 software required]

Y=265
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3
: Network provided
NONE : No data

END

126

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

For providing the Calling Party Name for outgoing call to the network, do the following programming.
[North America]
[Series 3600 software required]
NOTE 1: This feature is available only when the 24PRT card is used.
NOTE 2: This programming is effective when ISDN Protocol type is assigned to 28 (National ISDN-2
[NI-2]) by CMAA Y=06.
Page 102
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM77

Assign the Calling Party Name to each stations

with character code/character.

Y=0
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 20-7F: Calling Party Name Character Code
(Maximum 32 digits)
See Command Manual.

NOTE:

Y=1
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character
(Maximum 16 characters)
NOTE

The characters available for assigning are 0-9, A-Z with MAT/CAT.

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class B to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15

Allow Calling Party Name sending to ISDN.

Y=156
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B assigned
by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM35

Provide the Calling Party Name sending to

ISDN.

Y=268
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM08

Assign the Calling Party Name sending to

ISDN when making an outgoing call from Sub
Line.

(1) 502
(2) 0 : Name of My Line
1 : Name of Sub Line

END

127

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

SID to Terminating User-Display

[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]
To provide Calling Name Display for incoming calls from ISDN, assign the following data.
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15

Allow Calling Name Display for incoming

calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned
by CM12 Y=02.

Y=136
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Calling Name Display

CM08

Specify the duration of displaying the name

when the incoming call is answered/the select
key for Calling Number Display and Calling
Name Display or CID key is pressed.
[Series 3300/3400/3500/3600 software
required]

(1) 537
(2) 0 : Until call is finished/key is pressed
again
1 : 6 seconds

NOTE:

CM35

When using Series 3700 R12.2 software or later, set the first data to
580.

Specify the duration of displaying the name

when the incoming call is answered/the select
key for Calling Number Display and Calling
Name Display or CID key is pressed.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]

(1) 580
(2) 0 : 6 seconds
1 : Until call is finished/key is pressed
again

Specify the duration of displaying the destination information when the outgoing call is answered by the destination via ISDN.
[Series 3300 software required]

(1) 538
(2) 0 : Until call is finished
1 : 6 seconds

Provide the ISDN trunk route with Calling

Name Display for incoming calls.

Y=156
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

128

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM74

Assign the calling party number, which is used

for Calling Name search, to the 1000-Slot
Memory Block No. 3.

Y=0
(1) 3 YY Z
3 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 3
NOTE 1
YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99
Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9
(2) Stored No.:
Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + , +
Calling Party No. (Maximum 16 digits)
NOTE 2
NONE : No data

NOTE 1: When this feature is provided, the

1000-Slot Memory Block No. 3 cannot be used for Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dialing).
NOTE 2: The calling party number must be
the number received from network,
including the area code.
Assign the calling party name to be displayed
for the calling party number assigned by
CM74 Y=0, to each Memory Slot number, by
character codes or characters.

Y=1
(1) 3 YY Z
3 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 3
YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99
Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9
(2) XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character
Code (Maximum 32 digits, 16
characters)
See Command Manual.
NONE : No data
Y=2
(1) 3 YY Z
3 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 3
YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99
Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9
(2) XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character
(Maximum 16 characters)
NONE : No data

CM90

Provide the Dterm with a Caller ID Display key.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F5010: Caller ID Display

Provide the Dterm with a select key of Calling

Number Display or Calling Name Display.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1099: Select Key of Calling No. Display
or Calling Name Display

Provide the ATTCON/DESKCON with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling
Name Display.

Y=00
(1) ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6122: Select Key of Calling No. Display
or Calling Name Display

END

129

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

To indicate the reason why the calling number is not informed from the network, on the LCD of Dterm/
ATTCON/DESKCON.
[Hong Kong]
NOTE:

This feature is available only when the PN-24PRTA card is used for the trunk route.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Assign the sending method of calling number

from the network, to each trunk route.

Y=129 Calling No. sending method

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: CALLER ID

Specify whether the LCD indicates the reason

why the calling number is not informed from
the network.

Y=133
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To indicate
1 : Not indicated

When CM35 Y=133 is assigned as 0, the reason is indicated as follows.

A call from a calling party which does not
inform the calling number:
PRIVACY
A call from a network or a single line telephone which cannot inform the calling number:
OUT OF AREA
A call from a public telephone:
No indication
END

130

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

CPN to Terminating User-Display

[North America]
To provide Calling Name Display for incoming calls from National ISDN 2/NTI (DMS100), assign the
following programming.
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15

Allow Calling Name Display for incoming

calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned
by CM12 Y=02.

Y=136
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Calling Name Display

Specify the displaying pattern of Caller ID on

the LCD of Dterm before answering or after answering a trunk call.
[Series 3800 software required]

Y=400
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : To display Calling No. on upper line of
LCD, Calling Name on middle line of
LCD
1 : To display Calling Name on upper line
of LCD, Calling No. on middle line of
LCD
7 : Not displayed Calling No. and Calling
Name simultaneously

NOTE 1: When the second data of CM15

Y=400 is set to 0, set the second
data of CM15 Y=136 to 1 (Calling
Name Display).
NOTE 2: When the second data of CM15
Y=400 is set to 1, set the second
data of CM15 Y=136 to 0 (Calling
Number Display).
CM08

Specify the duration of displaying the name

when the incoming call is answered/the select
key for Calling Number Display and Calling
Name Display or CID key is pressed.
[Series 3300/3400/3500/3600 software
required]
NOTE:

(1) 537
(2) 0 : Until call is finished/key is pressed
again
1 : 6 seconds

When using Series 3700 R12.2 software or later, set the first data to
580.

131

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM08

Specify the duration of displaying the name

when the incoming call is answered/the select
key for Calling Number Display and Calling
Name Display or CID key is pressed.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]

(1) 580
(2) 0 : 6 seconds
1 : Until call is finished/key is pressed
again

Specify the duration of displaying the destination information when the outgoing call is answered by the destination via ISDN.
[Series 3300 software required]

(1) 538
(2) 0 : Until call is finished
1 : 6 seconds

Provide the Dterm with a Caller ID Display key.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F5010: Caller ID Display

Provide the Dterm with a select key of Calling

Number Display or Calling Name Display.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1099: Select Key of Calling No. Display
or Calling Name Display

Provide the ATTCON/DESKCON with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling
Name Display.

Y=00
(1) ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6122: Select Key of Calling No. Display
or Calling Name Display

Specify whether the calling party name is sent

to CCIS network.

Y=28
(1) 0-7: CCIS Channel No.
(2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

CM90

CMA7

NOTE:

DATA

When providing tandem connection

(ISDN to CCIS), this data is required to relay a calling party name.

END

132

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Subaddress-Present
(1)

Calling Party Subaddress

When a station has dialed an ISDN subscriber
number, the station number is automatically sent
as a Calling Party Subaddress.

4211

PBX
TRK

Dial
214-555
-5000

ISDN
555-5000
4211

Calling Party
Subaddress

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Provide the system with Calling Party Subaddress to ISDN.

(1) 400
(2) 0: To send

END

(2)

Called Party Subaddress

When the system has received a Called
Party Subaddress (Calling Station
Number) from an ISDN subscriber, the
system connects the call with the
specified terminal.

TRK
4210

TRK

ISDN
Dial 214-555-5000
+ 4211

4211

4212

START

DESCRIPTION

CM08

Specify the terminating system for Called Party Subaddress.

NOTE:

214-555-5000 + 4211

Subaddress

DATA

If CM35 Y=143 is set to 0 for

Event Based CCIS, assign the second data to 0.

(1) 401
(2) 0 :Station Call
1 : Terminating System assigned by
CM30 Y=02/03/40/41

END

133

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Trunk Provisioning Service Selection

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM30

Assign the trunk route to the trunk number assigned by CM07.

Y=00 Trunk Route Allocation

(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) 00-63: Route No.

END

134

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ISDN PRI Call By Call Service Selection

[North America Only]
Available Services
The following Binary Facility Code can be sent to the ISDN network when the called party number is
flagged as a Service. Services and features are selected by the ISDN subscriber at the time the ISDN is
ordered. The PBX must be programmed to match the services and features provided by the ISDN provider.
AT&T
SDN
Megacom
Megacom 800
Accunet
International 800
AT&T MultiQuest

Northern Telecom
Private
InWATS
OutWATS
Foreign Exchange
Tie Trunk

Call By Call LCR Programming

The following programming steps are an example of a long-distance call placed to any area code that begins with a 2 and that call is flagged as AT&T Megacom.
CM8A4005>12 (dialed #)=0001 (go to route pattern 001)
CM8A0001>1 (1st choice)=00010 (use LCR pattern 000 + trk route 10)
CM855>12=11 (maximum number of digits dialed)
CM8A5000>157=02 (Kind of called party=National)
(dialed number is 10 digits NANP, select National)
CM8A5000>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)
CM8A5000>159~161 are not used for this call.
CM8A5000>162=1 (Service)
CM8A5000>163=03 (Megacom)
CM8A5000>164 is not required for this call.

135

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

The next example details a local 7 digit call and will not used a Binary Facility Code.
CM8A4005>2 (dialed number)=001 (go to route pattern 000)
CM8A0000>1 (1st choice)=00210 (use LCR pattern 002 + trk route 10)
CM855>2=7 (maximum number of digits dialed)
CM8A5002>157=04 (Kind of called party=Local) (dialed number is 7 digits NANP, select Local)
CM8A5002>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)
CM8A5002>159~161 are not used for this call.
CM8A5002>162=1 (Service)
CM8A5002>163=NONE (not sending)
CM8A5002>164 is not required for this call.
NOTE:

These examples are provided to demonstrate the required programming. Always verify with the
ISDN provider as to how local calls should be handled.

Features
Carrier Identification Codes (CIC)
In ISDN terms placing a long-distance call using the equal access carrier code is a feature. There are times
when, depending upon the type of service provider (LEC or IEX), the PBX must contain the following
programming to complete a long-distance call by using CIC.
Currently all CIC are three digits in length preceded by a 10. Example: To dial AT&T a user dials 10288
+ the long-distance number. The PBX must route the call based on 10288 or a portion of that number. ISDN
complicates this process by identifying each CIC at the PBX level.
For example: Without ISDN the PBX is able to simply outpulse 10288 and the public network would provide connection to AT&T. With ISDN used for routing equal access calls, the PBX must translate the
10288 in its entirety and provide the network with four pieces of information as described below. The implementation of this feature is further complicated by the fact that this is only required by some ISDN providers and not others.

136

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Required Network Information

Four components are required by the network when sending CIC information. This information can be
found in the SETUP message.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

FEATURE (A statement advising the network that this is a feature based call, as opposed to a Service
based call).
TYPE OF NETWORK ID (The PBX should send out NATIONAL for this information).
NETWORK ID PLAN NUMBER (The Interchange Carrier should be sent).
NETWORK ID CHARACTER (XXX) (For AT&T the PBX sends out 288).

Use the following programming to assign the ISDN PRI Call By Call Identification Codes.
CM8A4005>10 (dialed number)=406 (go to table 406)
CM8A4006>288 (dialed number)=010 (use route pattern 010)
CM8A0010>1 (1st choice)=02010 (use LCR pattern 020 + trk route 10)
CM8A5020>157=02 (Kind of called party=National)
CM8A5020>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)
CM8A5020>159=02 (Type of Network ID=National)
CM8A5020>160=01 (Network ID Plan Number=Interexchange Carrier)
CM8A5020>161=288 (CIC for AT&T)
CM8A5020>162=1 (Service)
CM8A5020>163=01~16
The above programming will allow the 10288 to be sent out with the proper Setup message to the network.
However, further LCR programming is required because the network will not understand what 10288 is as
a dialed number. Use the following LCR programming to delete the 10288 digits from being sent to the
ISDN.
CM8A5020>151=0 (Allow digit deletion.)
CM8A5020>153=05 (Delete the first five digits of the dialed number)
NOTE:

This programming example only details the required steps for the 288 CIC. Each CIC must be
programmed in different tables to allow CM8A5XXX-Y=161 to send out the unique CIC to the
network.

137

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

START
CM8A

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the kind of the called party number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 157: Kind of Called Party No.
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: International
02
: National
03
: Network
04
: Local
05
: Not used
06
: Speed Dial
NONE : Unknown

Assign the Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifier
(2) 00
: Unknown
01
: ISDN/Telephone Numbering
Plan
02
: Not used
03
: Data Numbering Plan
04
: Telex Numbering Plan
05
: Not used
06
: Not used
07
: Not used
08
: National Numbering Plan
09
: Private Numbering Plan
NONE : Unknown

Assign the Type of Network ID number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 159: Type of Network ID
(2) 00-07 : Type of Network ID No.
NONE : No data

138

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

A
CM8A

DATA

Assign the Network ID Plan number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 160: Network ID Plan
(2) 00-15 : Network ID Plan No.
NONE : No data

Assign the Network ID character.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 161: Network ID Character
(2) X-XXXXX: X=0-9, A (*), B (#)

NOTE:

For assigning 4 or 5 digits

Network ID;

Specify whether Call By Call is Feature or Service.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 162: Feature/Service
(2) 0 : Feature
1 : Service

Assign the Binary Facility Coding Value.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 163: Binary Facility Coding Value
(2) For AT&T
01
: SDN
02
: MEGACOM800
03
: MEGACOM
04
: Not used
05
: Not used
06
: ACCUNET
07
: Not used
08
: INTERNATIONAL800
16
: AT&T MULTIQUEST
NONE : No data
For Northern Telecom
01
: Private
02
: INWATS
03
: OUTWATS
04
: Foreign Exchange (FX)
05
: Tie Trunk (TIE)
NONE : No data

139

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

B
CM8A

DATA

Assign the WATS Band number.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 164: WATS Band No.
(2) 00-09 : WATS Band No.
NONE : No data

Specify whether the Transit Network Selection

is sent to the network.

Y=5000-5255
LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 172: Sending Transit Network Selection
(2) 0 : To send
3 : Not sent

NOTE:

Network-Specific Facilities or Transit Network Selection is sent according to the

following condition.
CM8A Y=5000-5255>172

CM8A Y=5000-5255>163

Data assigned

Network-Specific
Facilities are sent

NONE :
No data

No information
element is sent

0
Transit Network
Selection is sent

END

140

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Advice of Charge-Display
[Australia/France/Germany/Netherlands/Italy/Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/
Sweden]
START

DESCRIPTION

CM08

Specify the Advice of Charge (AOC) display

on Dterm when the charge total is over
$9999.99/655.35.
(After 6 seconds, the display goes off.)

(1) 402
(2) 0 : Flashing display
1 : Fixed display

Provide Advice of Charge (AOC).

(1) 404
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

Specify Advice of Charge (AOC) information

is sent to PMS.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]

(1) 841
(2) 0 : To send (dollar/euro charge)
1 : Not sent (call unit)

NOTE:
CM42

DATA

To send call unit to PMS, set the second data of CM08>841 to 1.

Specify the call charge per unit.

By this setting, the call charge is calculated according to the call unit sent from the network.

(1) 69: dollar/euro/integral charge per unit

(2) 00-99: 00-99 dollars/euro
00-99: integral charge per unit
(1) 70: cent/euro cent/two decimals charge per
unit
(2) 00-99: 00-99 cents/euro cents
00-99: two decimals charge per unit

END

NOTE:

When you require Call Recording of ISDN call, do the data programming for SMDR, CIS or
PMS. For details, refer to the Feature Programming Manual.

141

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

[ITU-T (UAE) Only]

[Series 3500 software required]
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAA

Provide the PRT/BRT card with ISDN Advice

of Charge (AOC) feature.

Y=16
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of PRT/BRT card assigned by CM05
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

CM08

Provide the Advice of Charge (AOC).

(1) 404
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

CM42

Specify the call charge per unit.

By this setting, the call charge is calculated according to the call unit sent from the network.

(1) 69: integral charge per unit

(2) 00-99: integral charge per unit
(1) 70: two decimals charge per unit
(2) 00-99: two decimals charge per unit

END

NOTE:

When you require Call Recording of ISDN call, do the data programming for SMDR, CIS or
PMS. For details, refer to the Feature Programming Manual.

142

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Alternate Routing for ISDN

[Australia Only]
To provide Alternate Routing to the other trunk route (ISDN/CCIS/COT/tie line/IPT), when a call originating to the ISDN route is not available due to a line fault or other reason:
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM29

Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to

each tenant.

(1) 00-63: Tenant No.

(2) 710-713: Numbering Plan Group 0-3

CM20

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3.

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3

CM35

Provide the ISDN route with Alternate Routing

when a fault occurs.

Y=187
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM8A

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to each LCR Group.

Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group 0-3
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Y=4005-4007
Area Code Development Pattern No.
5-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007.

Y=0000-0255
Route Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

END

143

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Centrex SHF over ISDN

[New Zealand Only]
To send hooking signal from a Dterm to a main PBX via ISDN, do the following programming.
PBX
Dterm

DLC

MAIN PBX

DTI

DTI

Dterm

DLC

ISDN

DCH

DCH

ISDN

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Provide the voice channel trunk route for the

main PBX with the Centrex function.

Y=86
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM90

Assign the SHF Key on the Dterm.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1009: SHF (Hooking Signal sent to outside)

END

144

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ETSI ISDN Overlap Sending

[For EU]
[Series 3300 software required]
NOTE:

This feature is not available for call origination from the ISDN terminal.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Provide the system with ETSI ISDN Overlap

Sending.
DTI INITIAL

(1) 644
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

BRT INITIAL
CM20

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3.

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3

CM8A

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to each LCR Group.

Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group 0-3
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Y=4005-4007
Area Code Development Pattern No.
5-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007.

Y=0000-0255
Route Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

145

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM8A

For area code addition, designate the digits to

be added.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 100: Designation of digit Addition Pattern
No.
(2) 9000-9255: Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
CCC
: No digit addition
Y=9000-9025: Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
(1) 0
(2) X-X...X: Digits to be added
(Maximum 32 digits)

To delete the designated digit of an area code

assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007.

NOTE:

Y=5000-5255
(1) 153: Designation of digit to be deleted from
area code assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007
(2) 00 : No digit deletion
01-10 : Leading 1-10 digits deletion
CCC : No digit deletion

When originating a call, the digit number of SETUP message to ISDN is as follows:
The digit number of SETUP message
=[20 digits]-[Number of digit deletion (2nd data set by CM8A Y=5000-5255>153)]
For example, when CM8A Y=5000-5255>153 is set to 02 (2 digits area code deletion) and
a calling station dials number 0-1234567890123456789012345* (26 digits), ISDN
message sent from the system becomes as follows.
ISDN message:SETUP message: 345678901234567890 (18 digits)
INFO message: 12345 (5 digits)
*: Header 0 is LCR access code for LCR Group 0 set by CM20>A126, and following number 12 is an area code.

Assign the sending an area code to ISDN as a

Called Party Subaddress.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 155: Designation of sending area code as a
Called Party Subaddress
(2) 0: Available

146

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JANUARY/31/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

B
CM85

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Specify the maximum number of digits to be

dialed by Calling Party.
The maximum number of digits including the
area codes should be assigned to each area
code.

CM35

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
(1) X-X...X: Area code dialed, Maximum 8
digits
(2) 01-79: 1 digit-79 digits
24 : 24 digits

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern

number for Toll Restriction and maximum digit analysis to each trunk route.

Y=76
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-7

Assign the ISDN call origination procedure.

Y=206
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : En-bloc call origination and overlap
call origination
1 : En-bloc call origination only

Assign the number of division digits.

Y=207
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-31: 0 digit-31 digits
63 : Not used

END

147

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ETSI ISDN Overlap Receiving

[For EU]
NOTE:

This feature is not available when using the ISDN terminal.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM20

Assign the Station Numbering Plan data to the

leading one, two, three or four digits of station
number.

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Leading 1-4 digits of Station
No.
(2) 801: 1 digit Station No.
802: 2 digits Station No.
803: 3 digits Station No.
804: 4 digits Station No.
805: 5 digits Station No.
806: 6 digits Station No.
807: 7 digits Station No.
808: 8 digits Station No.

CM30

Assign the data for DID to the trunk numbers

assigned by CM07.

Y=02 Day Mode

Y=03 Night Mode
(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by
CM07 Y=01/02
(2) 18: ISDN Indial

148

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

A
CM35

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the data for DID Digit Conversion to

the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

Y=18 Digit Conversion on DID call

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide
Y=170 Development Table
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Development Table 1 (For Maximum
DID number 8 digits)
3 : Development Table 0 (For Maximum
DID number 4 digits)
Y=12 Number of digits to be received
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 1 digit
1 : 2 digits
2 : 3 digits
3 : 4 digits
Y=171 Number of digits to be converted
for Development Table 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 01-08: 1-8 digits
15 : 4 digits

CM76

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 0.

Y=00
(1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.
NONE : No data

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 1.

Y=90
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.
NONE : No data

Assign the data for interpreting the digits received.

Y=01 Day Mode

(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be terminated
DXX: Change terminating system to:
D14: Attendant Console

149

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

To distinguish the maximum number of digits

received from ISDN for each trunk route, specify an Area Code Development Pattern number
to each trunk route number.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Y=202
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-7
15 : Not used

Provide the ETSI ISDN Overlap Receiving

feature for each trunk route.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Y=203
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

CM85

Specify the maximum number of digits to be

dialed by calling party.
The maximum number of digits including the
area codes should be assigned to each area
code.

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
(1) X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8
digits
(2) 01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits
25-79 : 25 digits-79 digits

CM08

Specify whether the system connects to the

calling party when the system does not receive
the following DID number within the time set
by CM41 Y=0>109, after the first DID number
of the calling party is received.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

(1) 626
(2) 0 : Not connected
1 : To connect

Specify whether the system connects to the

calling party when the DID number of digits
received from ISDN is more than the maximum number of digits assigned by CM85
Y=0-7.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

(1) 627
(2) 0 : Not connected
1 : To connect

Specify the ORT timer for ETSI ISDN Overlap

Receiving.
[Series 3300 software required]

Y=0
(1) 109
(2) 03-99: 3-99 seconds
(1 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 6 seconds.

CM41

DATA

150

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to BRT/DTI/PRT/CCT) with LCR development, do the
following programming.
C

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM20

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3.

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3

CM8A

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to each LCR Group.

Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group 0-3
(2) 4000-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Y=4000-4007 Area Code Development

Pattern No. 0-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A
Y=4000-4007.

Y=0000-0255
Route Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No. 00-63

151

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM8A

For area code addition, designate the digits to

be added.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 100: Designation of digit Addition Pattern
No.
(2) 9000-9255: Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
CCC
: No digit addition
Y=9000-9255 Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
(1) 0
(2) X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32
digits)
X=0-9, A (*), B (#), C (Fixed Pause),
D (Programmable Pause)

For area code deletion, designate the digits to

be deleted.

Y=5000-5255
LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 152: Deletion of all digits of the area code
assigned by CM8A Y=4000-4007
(2) 0 : To delete
1 : Not deleted

END

152

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ETSI ISDN Addressing

[For EU]
[Series 3300 software required]
NOTE:

This feature is not available when using the ISDN terminal.

When ETSI ISDN Addressing is provided, calling party number of station B/C/D is displayed on a called
party station A as follows:
Station B
Country Code: 31
Area Code: 35
ISDN Subscriber No.: 5671234

PBX

Station C
Country Code: 31
Area Code: 229
ISDN Subscriber No.: 123456

ISDN

Station D
Country Code: 43
Area Code: 44
ISDN Subscriber No.: 1234567

Station A
Country Code: 31
Area Code: 35
ISDN Subscriber No.: 6892200

Call from station B to station A

Calling Party Number 05671234 is displayed on station A
(0: Trunk Access Code + 5671234: ISDN Subscriber Number)
Call from station C to station A
Calling Party Number 00229123456 is displayed on station A
(0: Trunk Access Code + 0: National Prefix + 229: Area Code + 123456: ISDN Subscriber Number)
Call from station D to station A
Calling Party Number 00043441234567 is displayed on station A
(0: Trunk Access Code + 00: International Prefix + 43: Country Code + 44: Area Code + 1234567:
ISDN Subscriber Number)
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Assign data for ETSI ISDN Addressing to required trunk route.

Y=222 International Prefix Code

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
X-XXXX: Prefix Code
(2) X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
Y=223 National Prefix Code
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XXXX: Prefix Code
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

A
153

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=224 Country Code
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XXXX: Country Code
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

CM35

Y=225 Area Code

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XXXXXX: Area Code
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
Enable International/National Prefix Code display when a call terminates via ETSI ISDN.

Y=226 International/National Prefix Code

Display
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0
: Available

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class B to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15

Allow International/National Prefix Code display in Service Restriction Class B assigned by

CM12 Y=02.

Y=155
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM35

Assign a trunk access code for outgoing call.

Y=44
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-31: 1 digit-31 digits
00-99: Trunk Access Code

CM08

Enable the trunk access code display when a

call terminates via ETSI ISDN.

(1) 633
(2) 0: Available

154

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Specify whether the Type of Number/Numbering Plan Identification of CPN is provided, or

not.
[Series 3500 software required]
NOTE:

DATA
Y=234
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

If this data is set to 1, the setting

data of CM35 Y=230/231 is invalid.

Specify the Type of Number for outgoing call.

Y=230 Type of Number

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: Unknown
01: International Number
02: National Number
03: Network Specific Number
04: ISDN Subscriber Number
06: Abbreviated Number

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for

outgoing call.

Y=231 Numbering Plan Identification

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: Unknown
01: ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan
03: Data Numbering Plan
04: Telex Numbering Plan
08: National Standard Numbering Plan
09: Private Numbering Plan

END

155

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ETSI ISDN Channel Negotiation

[For EU]
[Series 3300 software required]
NOTE:

This feature is not available when using the ISDN terminal.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Provide the ETSI ISDN Channel Negotiation

to required trunk route.

Y=228
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

156

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) /

Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
[For EU]
[Series 3300 software required]
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN

Local Office Code Table number to required
stations. NOTE 1 on
Page 123

Y=12
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.
Y=13
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14

CM50

Assign ISDN Local Office Code to the Table

number assigned by CM12 Y=13.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
(2) X...X: Local Office Code
(Maximum 12 digits)

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class B to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15

For a call terminating office, allow the connected line number indication on Dterm display
in Service Restriction Class B assigned by
CM12 Y=02.

Y=153
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

For a call originating office, allow ETSI ISDN

Connected Line Identification Presentation
(COLP) in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

Y=154
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

157

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

For a call terminating office, provide the ETSI

ISDN Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP).

Y=220
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

For a call originating office, enable the receiving connected line number from call terminating office in ETSI ISDN Connected Line
Identification Presentation (COLP).

Y=221
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

Specify coding type when sending the ISDN

Connected Line Identification Presentation
(COLP).
[Series 3600 software required]

Y=267
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Codeset 5
(Spanish specification)
1 : Codeset 0
(ETSI specification)

Specify whether the connected line number indication is provided on ATTCON/DESKCON

display.

(1) 629
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

CM08

DATA

END

158

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Malicious Call Trace

[Australia Only]
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15

Allow Malicious Call Trace in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.
[Series 3500 software required]

Y=211
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

CM20

Assign the access code for Malicious Call

Trace.
[Series 3500 software required]

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A170: Malicious Call Trace

CM35

Provide the ISDN route with Malicious Call

Trace.

Y=106
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

CM90

Assign the Malicious Call Trace key to the

Dterm, if required.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A70: Malicious Call Trace

Assign the Malicious Call Trace key to the ATTCON/DESKCON.

Y=00
(1) ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6120: Malicious Call Trace

END

159

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

[For EU]
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM20

Assign the access code for Call Completion to

Busy Subscriber (CCBS).

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access code
(2) A004: Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS) Set
A005: Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS) Cancel

CM90

Assign a Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) key to the Dterm, if required.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0004: Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) Set/Cancel

CM35

Assign the trunk access code for Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS).

Y=44
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code

Assign the trunk route data to Call Completion

to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set from calling
party.

Y=277
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Allow
1 : Restricted

Assign the trunk route data to Call Completion

to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set to called party.

Y=278
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Allow
1 : Restricted

160

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM12

Assign Service Restriction Class B to each station.

Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN

Local Office Code Table number to required
stations. NOTE 1 on
Page 123

Y=12
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.
NONE : No data
Y=13
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
15 : No data

CM13

Specify the sending out of CPN (Calling Party

Number).

Y=25
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Not sent
NOTE 2 on
1 : To send
Page 123

CM15

Allow Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) set from calling party in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

Y=157
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B assigned
by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

Allow Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) set to called party in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02

Y=158
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B assigned
by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

Assign ISDN Local Office Code to the Table

number assigned by CM12 Y=13.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
(2) X...X : Local Office Code
(Maximum 12 digits)
NONE : No data

CM50

END

NOTE:

When providing the calling party number (CPN) to the network, do the programming of SID to
Network-Present.
Page 122

161

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM20

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3.

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3

CM90

Assign the LCR Group key on the Dterm, if

required.

Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A26: LCR Group 0
F0A27: LCR Group 1
F0A28: LCR Group 2

CM8A

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to each LCR Group.

Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group 0-3
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Y=4005-4007
Area Code Development Pattern No.
5-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007.

Y=0000-0255
Route Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

For area code addition, designate the digits to

be added.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 100: Designation of digit Addition Pattern
No.
(2) 9000-9255: Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
CCC
: No digit addition

A
162

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=9000-9025: Digit Addition Pattern No.
00-255
(1) 0
(2) X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32
digits)

CM8A

CM85

To delete the designated digit of an area code

assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 153: Designation of digit to be deleted from
area code assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007
(2) 00 : No digit deletion
01-10: Leading 1-10 digits deletion
CCC : No digit deletion

Assign the sending an area code to ISDN as a

Called Party Subaddress.

Y=5000-5255
(1) 155: Designation of sending area code as a
Called Party Subaddress
(2) 0: Available

Specify the maximum number of digits to be

Dialed by Calling Party.

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
(1) X-X...X: Area code dialed, Maximum 8
digits
(2) 01-79: 1 digit-79 digits
24 : 24 digits

The maximum number of digits including the

area codes should be assigned to each area
code.
CM35

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern

number for Toll Restriction and maximum digit analysis to each trunk route.

Y=76
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-7

END

163

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

ILC Assignment
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM10

Assign an ISDN line station number to the required LEN.

(1) 000-763: LEN

(2) EFX-EFXXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station
No.

NOTE:

We recommend the setting of ISDN

line station number by CM14, when
using Series 3200 R6.2 software or
later.

CM14

Assign the ISDN line station number to the required LEN.

[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: FP No.
ZZZ: 000-127: Port No.
(2) EFX-EFXXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station
No.

CM12

Assign a Tenant number to each ISDN line station number.

Y=04
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.
If no data is set, the default data is 01.

Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each ISDN

line station number, if required.

Y=01
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
(2) X Z: Trunk Restriction Class
X: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day
Mode
Z: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night
Mode
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

164

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM12

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number to the required ISDN line station number, if required.

Y=12
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
(2) X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.
NONE : No data

Assign a Local Office Code Table number to

the required ISDN line station number, if
required.

Y=13
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
(2) 00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.
00-14
15 : No data

Specify the facility control of Calling Party

Number (CPN), if required.

Y=25
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

CM13

NOTE:

DATA

This command is effective when

sending a Calling Party Number
(CPN) to ISDN.

CM29

Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to

each tenant.

(1) 00-63: Tenant No.

(2) 710-713: Numbering Plan Group 0-3

CM20

Assign the digit number of ISDN line station

number.

Y=0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) 801-808: 1 digit-8 digits

CM08

Specify whether the subaddress is sent to

ISDN when making a call from ISDN Terminal, if required.

(1) 430
(2) 0 : To send (As per CM08>431)
1 : Not sent

Specify the Calling Party Subaddress which is

sent to ISDN when making a call from ISDN
Terminal, if required.

(1) 431
(2) 0 : ISDN Line Station No. assigned by
CM10/CM14
1 : ISDN Terminal No.

Specify the forced release when a called ISDN

Terminal does not answer during 3 minutes, if
required.

(1) 432
(2) 0 : Not available
1 : Available

Assign Calling Party Number (CPN) which is

sent to ISDN when making a call from ISDN
Terminal, if required.

(1) 434
(2) 0 : CPN entered in ISDN Terminal
1 : CPN assigned by CM12 Y=12/13

165

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

B
CM08

CME5

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Specify the calling number, which is sent to

ISDN Terminal from Single Line Telephone/
Dterm (for station to station call).
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]

(1) 584
(2) 0 : Calling Party No. (assigned by CM12
Y=12, 13) NOTE
1 : Station No.

Allow sending extension information of Low

layer Compatibility (LLC) information element for connection between ISDN terminals/
ISDN trunks.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

(1) 722
(2) 0: Allow

Specify the make busy of B channel (B1, B2)

for ISDN Terminal, if required.

Y=2
(1) XXXXXXXX , Z
XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.
Z: 0: B1 channel
1: B2 channel
(2) 0 : Make busy
1 : In service

END

NOTE:

The calling party number consists of the following numbers.

Calling party number: YYYY
ISDN subscriber No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 (1-4 digits)
For example:
In this case, the Calling Party Number is 5000.
That is
ISDN Subscribers No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 is 5000.

166

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

ICH Assignment
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM05

Assign an AP number to each ICH/ILC (PN2ILCC) card. The AP number must match the
SENSE switch setting on the ICH/ILC (PN2ILCC) card.
INITIAL

Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 13: ICH card/ILC (PN-2ILCC) card

Specify the AP highway channel for ICH/ILC

(PN-2ILCC) card.
INITIAL

Y=1
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 0 : Use Expanded Highway channel
(128 time slots)
1 : Use Basic Highway channel
(128 time slots)

CMAA

Specify the type of ICH/ILC (PN-2ILCC)

card.
[Series 3700 R12.2 software required]
INITIAL

Y=14
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 0 : ILC card
1 : ICH card

CM06

Assign the ICH number/D channel number

controls ISDN terminal to the AP number of
ICH/ILC (PN-2ILCC) card assigned by
CM05.
INITIAL

Y=09
(1) 00-15: ICH No./D channel No. controls
ISDN terminal
(2) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. assigned by CM05

CMAC

Assign the ISDN line station number to the

ISDN line number of ICH/ILC (PN-2ILCC)
card.
INITIAL

Y=00
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No./D channel No.
controls ISDN terminal
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.

167

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CMAC

Specify the method of Terminal Endpoint

Identifier (TEI) assignment.
INITIAL
NOTE:

DATA

CMAC Y=02 must be assigned to

match the specification of ISDN
Terminal.

Specify the method of Layer 1 activation.

INITIAL
NOTE:

CMAC Y=04 must be assigned to

match the specification of ISDN Terminal.

Y=02
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No./D channel No.
controls ISDN terminal
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0 : Non-Automatic TEI Assignment
1 : Automatic TEI Assignment
Y=04
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No./D channel No.
controls ISDN terminal
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0 : Always activated
1 : Activated by call event

Specify the checking of TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) when Layer 2 data link is released.
INITIAL

Y=06
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No./D channel No.
controls ISDN terminal
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0 : To Provide
1 : Not Provided

Allow sending extension information of Low

layer Compatibility (LLC) information element for connection between ISDN terminals/
ISDN trunks.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
INITIAL

Y=11
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: D channel No. controls ISDN
terminal
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of 8ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0: Allow

168

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

B
CMAA

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the ISDN Terminal Type to the AP

number assigned by CM05.
ICH INITIAL

Y=06
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of ICH/ILC
(PN-2ILCC) assigned by
CM05
(2) 24 : ETSI Terminal
63 : Not ETSI Terminal

END

169

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

Point-to-Point Connection
PBX

MDF

ISDN Terminal/TA

ILC
Maximum 1965 ft. (600 m)

START

DESCRIPTION

CMAC

Assign the point-to-point connection as the

Layer 2 data link.
INITIAL

NOTE:

DATA
Y=01
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0: Point-to-Point Connection

When Point-to-Point Connection is selected, the PBX will address the BRI Terminal with
channel select (B1/B2) message. Some BRI Terminals cannot answer the call with this type
of signaling. Some of the BRI Terminals require a Calling Party Number sent from the
PBX. In this case, use Point-to-Multipoint for CMAC Y=01 and CM1B to assign extension
number for the BRI Terminal.

Assign the Non-Automatic TEI Assignment.

INITIAL

Y=02
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0: Non-Automatic TEI Assignment

Assign the Extended Passive Bus.

Y=03
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0: Extended Passive Bus

INITIAL

170

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAC

Assign the always activated as the method of

Layer 1 activation.
INITIAL

Y=04
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0: Always activated

END

171

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

Point-to-Multipoint Connection
PBX
MDF
ILC
Short Passive Bus
407

ISDN Terminal

400

300

Maximum 491 ft. (150 m)

MDF
ILC

Extended Passive Bus

417

ISDN Terminal

410

301

Maximum 164 ft. (50 m)

Maximum 1310 ft. (400 m)

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAC

Assign the point-to-multipoint connection as

the Layer 2 data link.
INITIAL

Y=01
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 1 : Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Specify the passive bus.

Y=03
(1) XX Z
XX: 00-15: ICH No.
Z : 0-7: ISDN Line No. of ICH card
: 0-1: ISDN Line No. of ILC
(PN-2ILCC) card
(2) 0 : Extended Passive Bus
1 : Short Passive Bus

INITIAL

CM1B

Assign an ISDN Terminal Multipoint station

number to the ISDN Line station number.
The numbers assigned in this command are
station numbers that are to be programmed in
the BRI terminal. CM12 Y=12 will use the station assignment from CM10/CM14.

(1) XXXXXXXX , Z
XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No. assigned by CM10/CM14
Z: 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Terminal Multipoint Station No.

END

172

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

BRI Programming Example:

The following is an example of common BRI Station Programming.
CM10 024>EF2125
025>EF2126

CM AC01> 000-1
001-1

CM AC03> 000-1
001-1
CM AC04> 000-1
001-1
CM AC06> 000-1
001-1

CM AC02> 000-1
001-1

CM AC00> 000-2125
001-2126

CM1B>2125, 0>2225*
2125, 1>2226
2
>None
7
2126, 0>2235*
2126, 1>2236*
2
>None
7
* Ext. 2225 and others assigned in CM1B are the Extension
numbers that should be entered into the BRI Terminals. Most
BRI Terminals require a 10 digits number.
If the BRI Terminals require a SPID [North America
Only], it is common to add a 3 digits number to the main
number.
For example;
Main number (1): 214-555-2225
Main number (2): 214-555-2226
SPID (1)
: 214-555-2225123
SPID (2)
: 214-555-2226123
SPIDs are required for NI-1 protocol and AT&T Point-toMultipoint. Devices that are set as AT&T Point-to-Point do
not use SPIDs.

173

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

Individual Terminal Call

(1)

ISDN Indial
When receiving an ISDN Terminal station number as the ISDN Indial number, or when converting
an ISDN Indial number to an ISDN Terminal station number, by CM76, the system connects the call
with the specified ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).
PBX
Converting 7715 to 400
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-7715
(ISDN Indial No.)

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

Do the following programming:

DID Addressing
Page 117
Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Page 172

174

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(2)

Called Party Subaddress

When the system has received a Called Party Subaddress (ISDN Terminal station number) from an
ISDN Subscriber, the system connects the call with the specified ISDN Terminal or TA on the same
bus (2B + D).
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-1111
(Office No.)
-400
ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

(Called Party
Subaddress=
ISDN Terminal Station No.)

Do the following programming:

Subaddress-Present
Page 133
Point-to-Multipoint Connection
Page 172

175

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(3)

Direct In Termination (DIT)

When the ISDN Terminal station number is assigned as the destination of DIT, the system connects
the call with the specified ISDN Terminal or TA on the same bus (2B + D).
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-7881
(Office No.)

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

In addition to the programming of Point-to-Multipoint Connection

following programming.

START

DESCRIPTION

CM30

Assign the data for DIT to the trunk numbers

assigned by CM07.

(1)

Assign the ISDN Terminal station number to

be terminated by Direct In Termination.

(1)

Page 172, do the

DATA
Y=02 Day Mode
Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination
Y=04 Day Mode
Y=05 Night Mode
Y=42 Mode A
Y=43 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Terminal Station
No.

END

176

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(4)

Station-to-Station Calling
When an ISDN Terminal user dials an ISDN Terminal station number within the system, the system
connects the call with the specified ISDN Terminal.
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

TRK

ISDN

ISDN Line
Station No. 301
ILC

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 417

ISDN Terminal Station No. 410 dials 400 to reach

ISDN Terminal 400 specifically.

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 410

Do the programming of Point-to-Multipoint Connection.

177

Page 172

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

Group Call
(1)

ISDN Indial
When receiving an ISDN line station number as ISDN Indial number, or when converting an ISDN
Indial number to an ISDN line station number by CM76, the system connects the call with all ISDN
Terminals or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).
PBX
Converting 7715 to 300
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-7715
(ISDN Indial No.)

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

Do the following programming:

DID Addressing
Page 117
Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Page 172

178

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(2)

Called Party Subaddress

When receiving an ISDN line station number as the Called Party Subaddress, the system connects
the call with all ISDN Terminals or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).
PBX
(Office Code 1111)
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-1111

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

(Office No.)
300
#
*

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

(Called Party
Subaddress)

Do the following programming:

Subaddress-Present
Page 133
Point-to-Multipoint Connection
Page 172

179

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(3)

Direct In Termination (DIT)

When the ISDN line station number is assigned as the destination of DIT, the call from ISDN
terminates all ISDN Terminals on the same bus (2B + D) simultaneously.
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 7880
ILC

TRK

ISDN

214-555-7880
(Office No.)

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

In addition to the programming of Point-to-Multipoint Connection

following programming.

START

DESCRIPTION

CM30

Assign the data for DIT to the trunk numbers

assigned by CM07.

(1)

Assign the ISDN Terminal station number to

be terminated by Direct In Termination.

(1)

Page 172, do the

DATA
Y=02 Day Mode
Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination
Y=04 Day Mode
Y=05 Night Mode
Y=42 Mode A
Y=43 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=01/02
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Terminal Station
No.

END

180

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

(4)

Station-to-Station Calling
When an ISDN Terminal user dials an ISDN line station number within the system, the system
connects the call with all ISDN Terminals.
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400

TRK

ISDN

ISDN Line
Station No. 301
ILC

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 417

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 410

Do the programming of Point-to-Multipoint Connection.

181

Page 172

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

ISDN TERMINAL DATA PROGRAMMING

When Single Line Telephone, Dterm, DtermIP, PS user dials an ISDN line station number within the
system, the system connects the call with all ISDN Terminals.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
PBX
ISDN Line
Station No. 300
ILC

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 407

TRK

ISDN

ISDN Terminal
Station No. 400
TRK
TRK

PS Station No. 417

SLT/Dterm
Station No. 410

DtermIP
Station No. 401

Page 172, do the

In addition to the programming of Point-to-Multipoint Connection

following programming.
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM08

Provide the system with the voice communication between ISDN terminal group and Single
Line Telephone/Dterm/DtermIP/PS within the
system.
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

(1) 527
(2) 0 : Provide
1 : Not provided

END

182

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Programming Summary
Do the system data programming for Event Based CCIS, according to the procedure on the next page.
As for the CCIS feature programming, refer to the CCIS System Manual.
The figure below is an outline of BRI to BRI connections.
BRI Trunks

BRI Trunks
ISDN
Mate Side Trunks

Mate Side Trunks

Home Side Trunks

Home Side Trunks

V
O
I
C
E

V
O
I
C
E
CCH

PBX A

PBX B

CCH

Programming for PBX A and PBX B is required on each programming procedure.

183

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Event Based CCIS Programming Summary

START

Numbering Plan
Programming

BRI or PRI?

Page 185

PRI
Refer to ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING

Page 89 NOTE

BRI
BRI Trunk Programming
for E-CCIS

Page 186
NOTE

Home-Side Trunk
Programming

Page 194
NOTE

Mate-Side Trunk
Programming

Page 196
NOTE

Incoming Termination
Programming

Page 203

Access Code/Terminating
No. Assignment

Page 204

Release Timer
for Virtual Tie Lines

Page 205

CCH Data
Assignment

Page 206

Tandem Connection
Programming

Page 207

Closed Numbering
Programming

Page 208

END

NOTE:

Refer to Event Based CCIS Trunk Data Table also.

184

Page 209

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Numbering Plan Programming

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM20

Assign station numbers, LCR and trunk route

access codes.

Y=0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) 801-808 : 1 to 8 digits station
A126-A129: LCR Group 0-3
100-163 : Trunk Route 00-63

END

185

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

BRI Trunk Programming

START

DESCRIPTION

CM05

Assign an AP number to the BRT card.

The AP number must match the SENS switch
setting on the BRT card.
INITIAL
NOTE:

DATA
Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 10: BRT card

The AP number 20-31 cannot be set

to the PN-BRTA card.

Specify the AP highway channel for PN4BRTA-A card.

INITIAL

Y=1
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 0 : Use Expanded Highway channel
(128 time slots)
1 : Use Basic Highway channel
(128 time slots)

Assign an Remote Site number that accommodates AP cards to the AP number assigned by
CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL

Y=8
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) XX 99
XX: 01-15: Remote Site No. 01-15
[Series 3200 R6.2 software or
Series 3300 software required]
01-30: Remote Site No. 01-30
[Series 3400 software required]
NONE : No data

Assign the accommodation type of the Remote

Site to the AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL

Y=6
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 1 : Remote Site
3 : AP card

NOTE:

Only when accommodating the BRT

card in Remote Site, set the second
data to 1 (remote site) to the AP
number assigned by CM05 Y=0.

186

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CMAA

Assign the ISDN Protocol Type for DCH circuit on the BRT card.
BRT INITIAL

Y=06
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of BRT assigned by
CM05
(2) ISDN Protocol Type
17 : Australia
18 : New Zealand
20 : AT&T (#4, #5 ESS)
21 : NTI (DMS 100, 250)
22 : Australia ETSI
24 : ETSI Standard
(Brazil, Columbia, Indonesia, UAE)
25 : ITU-T Standard (Thailand)
27 : USA NI-1
28 : USA NI-2
31 : Germany
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
32 : Netherlands
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]/
Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/
Sweden
[Series 3500 software required]
[For EU]
33 : Italy
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
[For EU]
63 : Not used

CM07

Assign an ISDN trunk number to each Channel

number of BRT.
INITIAL

Y=02
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 04-15, 20-31: AP No. assigned by
CM05
ZZ : B channel No. (00/01: BRT)
(00-03: 2BRT)
(00-07: 4BRT)
(2) D000-D255: Trunk No.
Trunk No. already assigned
by CM10/CM14 cannot to be
used.

NOTE:

Be sure to assign the trunk numbers

to all circuits (00-03 of the 2BRT
card, 00-07 of the 4BRT card), even
if only one PCM digital line is accommodated to the 2BRT card or
less than four PCM digital lines are
accommodated to the 4BRT card.
Set make-busy to the unused trunk
numbers by CME5 Y=1, 2nd data=0.

187

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM30

Assign a trunk route to each ISDN trunk used

for Voice channel (B channel).
NOTE:

DATA

BRT route must be separated from

analog trunk routes.

Y=00
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route

Assign the trunk route data to each ISDN incoming trunk used for Voice channel only.

(1)

NOTE:

Y=19
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) NONE : No data NOTE

Follow the initial data setting.

Y=02 Day Mode

Y=03 Night Mode
Y=40 Mode A
Y=41 Mode B
000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) 18: ISDN Indial

Assign the ISDN Local Office Code Table

number to each ISDN trunk.

Y=34
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) 00-14: Local Office Code Table No.

NOTE:

Y=35
(1) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07
Y=02
(2) NONE : No data NOTE

Follow the initial data setting.

CM50

Assign the ISDN Local Office Code.

Y=05
(1) 00-14: Local Office Table No. assigned by
CM30 Y=34
(2) X....X
(Maximum 12 digits)

CMAC

Assign the last 4 digits of telephone number +

Service Profile ID (SPID) to each B channel
number.
[North America Only]
INITIAL

Y=30
(1) XX Z
XX: 04-15, 20-31: AP No. assigned by
CM05
Z : 0-7: B channel No.
(2) XXXX ZZZZ
(Last 4 digits of tel No. + SPID: 8 digits)

188

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Assign the trunk route data to the route number

assigned by CM30 Y=00.

Y=00 Kind of Trunk Route

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: ISDN Trunk
Y=01 Dialing Signal Type
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2 : DP 10 PPS (Incoming/Outgoing)
3 : DP 10/20 PPS (Incoming)
DP 20 PPS (Outgoing)
4 : DTMF (Incoming/Outgoing)
7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)
Y=02 Call Direction
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : Bothway Trunk
Y=04 Answer signal from distant office
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives (ISDN Trunk)
Y=05
Release Signal from distant office
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives
Y=09 Incoming Connection Signaling
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 08: ISDN Indial
Y=14 SMDR for outgoing call
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide
Y=16
Hooking Signal Sending to outside
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not sending
Y=28 Outgoing Trunk Queuing
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Restricted

189

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=39 Trunk release by detection of reversal of tip and ring
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : To release

CM35

NOTE:

Follow the initial data setting.

Y=40
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 31 : Abbreviated Code 31 NOTE
Y=79 Terminal connection form for ISDN
Basic Rate Interface
BRT INITIAL
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Point-to-Point
1 : Point-to-Multipoint
Y=90
Assignment of BRT route for ISDN
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: ISDN-Basic Rate Interface
Y=143 Sending method of CCIS channel
No.
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : By Subaddress
1 : By dialed-in digits

Specify the method of Layer 1 activation.

BRT INITIAL
Y=144
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Activated by call event
1 : Always activated

190

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

CM35

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
NOTE:

DATA

When sending the in-band tone to

the calling station from ISDN, set
the second data to 1.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the calling station receives the in-band tone or when the
calling station goes on-hook.

Assign the method of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignments for the Trunk number.
[Series 3800 software required]
BRT INITIAL
NOTE:

Automatic TEI assignment (set the

second data to 0) is available only
when second data of CM35 Y=79 is
set to 1 (Point-to-Multipoint connection).

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released

when the system receives ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08
from ISDN (effective for an incoming call).
[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
NOTE:

Y=158
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To release
1 : Not released

Y=283
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Automatic TEI Assignment
(TEI: 64-126)
1 : Non-Automatic TEI Assignment
(TEI: 0 fixed)

Y=208
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Not released
1 : To release

When sending the in-band tone to

the called station from ISDN, set the
second data to 0.
In this case, the ISDN trunk will be
released automatically in 30 seconds after the called station receives
the in-band tone or when the called
station goes on-hook.

191

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

To provide DID Digit Conversion:

NOTE:

F
CM35

If CM35 Y=143 is set to 1 for Event Based CCIS, the number of digits received on DID must
be assigned by CM35 Y=12.

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the data for DID Digit Conversion to

the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

Y=18 Digit Conversion on DID call

(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide
Y=170 Development Table
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Development Table 1
3 : Development Table 0
Y=12 Number of digits to be received
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 1 digit
1 : 2 digits
2 : 3 digits
3 : 4 digits
Y=78 Number of digits to be converted for
Development Table 0
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Leading 2-4 digits
1 : All digits of DID are converted by
CM76
Y=171 Number of digits to be converted
for Development Table 1
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 01-08: 1-8 digits
15 : 4 digits

192

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM76

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 0.

Y=00
(1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the Number Conversion Block number

for Development Table 1.

Y=90
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the data for interpreting the digits received.

(1)

Y=01 Day Mode

Y=02 Night Mode
Y=03 Mode A
Y=04 Mode B
000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be terminated
DXX: Change terminating system to:
D09: Automated Attendant
D14: Attendant Console
D16: Remote Access to System
(DISA)

END

193

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Home-Side Trunk Programming

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM07

Assign a trunk number to each channel on the

Home-Side trunk.

Y=05
(1) 3200-3230: Virtual channel No. 00-30
(Even No.) of the Home-Side
Trunk
(2) D000-D255: Trunk No.
Trunk No. already assigned by CM10/
CM14 should not be used.

NOTE:

CM30

Assign a trunk route number to each trunk.

NOTE:

CM35

The Virtual channel number on the

Home-Side trunk must be an even
number (00, 02, 04, ... 30).
INITIAL

Set the trunk route for voice channels and the trunk route for common
signaling channel respectively.

Assign the trunk route data to each voice channel and common signaling channel route of the
Event Based CCIS, as Tie Lines.

Y=00
(1) 000-255: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Y=00
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 04: Tie Line
Y=01
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: DP
Y=04
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives
Y=05
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives
Y=09
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 06: 2nd DT/Timing Start

Specify the PAD patterns to voice channel

route.

Y=19
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-3 : Programmable PAD (See CM42.)
4-7 : Fixed PAD
NOTE:

For details of PAD data, refer to

Command Manual.

194

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

A
CM35

NOTE:

DATA

Follow the initial data setting in

Home-Side trunk.

Y=40
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 31 : Abbreviated Code 31 NOTE

Determine the trunk seizure sequence.

Y=83
(1) 00-63: B channel Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: As per CM08>078

Provide the voice channel and common signaling channel route with No. 7 CCIS facilities.

Y=90
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: No. 7 CCIS

Assign a CCIS channel number to each common signaling channel and voice channel
route.

Y=91
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-7: CCIS Channel No.

Specify the voice channel and common signaling channel route as the Event Based CCIS
route.

Y=135
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Event Based CCIS Route

NOTE:

Y=143
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : By dialed-in digits NOTE

Follow the initial data setting in

Home-Side trunk.

CM08

Select the trunk seizure sequence.

(1) 078
(2) 1 : Lowest available trunk

CM30

Assign a Circuit Identification Code (CIC) to

each trunk used for voice channel.
INITIAL

Y=35
(1) 000-255: Trunk No.
(2) 001-127: CIC

NOTE:

CIC represents a circuit number to

designate a trunk (of each trunk
route) used as a voice channel in the
No. 7 CCIS network. Do not assign
a CIC to a trunk used as Common
Signaling Channel.

END

195

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Mate-Side Trunk Programming

START

DESCRIPTION

CM07

Assign a trunk number to each channel on the

Mate-Side trunk.
NOTE:

CM30

DATA

The Virtual channel number on the

Mate-Side Trunk must be an odd
number (01, 03, 05, ... 31).
INITIAL

Y=05
(1) 3201-3231: Virtual channel No. 01-31
(Odd No.) of the Mate-Side
Trunk
(2) D000-D255: Trunk No.

Assign a trunk route number to each trunk.

Y=00
(1) 000-255: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign a trunk number, of the opposite office,

sent to the network on Event Based CCIS connection. The trunk number is sent by the subaddress to activate the relation between the
trunks used for Event Based CCIS.

Y=19
(1) 000-255: Trunk No.
(2) X-XXXX: Trunk No. of the opposite office

NOTE 1: CM30 Y=19 is not required when

the trunk number is sent by ISDN Indial dialed-in digits.
(CM35 Y=143>1)
NOTE 2: CM30 Y=19 must be an unique combination between the offices.
CM35

Assign the trunk route data to each voice channel and common signaling channel route of the
Event Based CCIS, as Tie Lines.

Y=00
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 04: Tie Line

NOTE:

Y=01
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing) NOTE

Follow the initial data setting in

Mate-Side trunk.

196

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION

DATA
Y=04
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives

CM35

NOTE:

Follow the initial data setting in

Mate-Side trunk.

Y=05
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives NOTE
Y=09
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Ring Down (Loop Start C.O. line)
NOTE

Assign the abbreviated codes for terminating

number of the opposite office.
The terminating number and its memory
allocation should be assigned by CM71,
CM72.

Y=40
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-31: Abbreviated Codes

NOTE:

Y=90
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 7 : Not used NOTE

Follow the initial data setting in

Mate-Side trunk.

Y=91
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) NONE : No data NOTE
Specify the voice channel and common signaling channel route as the Event Based CCIS
route.

Y=135
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Event Based CCIS Route

Specify the method to send the CCIS channel

number of virtual trunks between the offices,
either subaddress number or ISDN Indial dialed-in digits, to each voice channel and common signaling channel route.

Y=143
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : By Subaddress
1 : By dialed-in digits

Specify the Information Transfer Capability of

the ISDN line used for Event Based CCIS.

Y=154
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 5 : 3.1 kHz audio
6 : Speech
7 : Unrestricted digital information

END

197

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

To provide Verification of Connection for Event Based CCIS, do the following programming.
The following data must be set on the opposite PBX identically.
See also the data setting example on the following pages.
DESCRIPTION

START

DATA

CM35

Provide Verification of Connection to the

Mate-Side trunk route for the voice channels
and the common signaling channel.

Y=152
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. of Mate-Side
Trunk for voice channels and common signaling channel
(2) 0: To provide

CM50

Assign the ISDN subscriber number of own office for the voice channel route and the common signaling channel route.
This number is sent and verified with the number which is set by CM72 on the opposite office.

Y=06
(1) 000-254: Trunk No. of Mate-Side Trunk
for voice channels and common
signaling channel
(2) X...XXX: Subscriber No. of ISDN line for
voice channels and common signaling channel
(Maximum 16 digits)

CM35

Assign the abbreviated codes for terminating

number of the opposite office.
The terminating number and its memory allocation should be assigned by CM71, CM72.

Y=40
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. of Mate-Side
Trunk for voice channels and common signaling channel
(2) 00-31 : Abbreviated Codes

CM71

Assign the memory allocation to store the terminating number of the opposite office.

(1) 66
(2) XXX YYY
XXX: 000-299: First Memory Slot No.
YYY: 001-016: Number of Memory Slot
allocated

CM72

Set the stored number (terminating number of

the opposite office: access code for ISDN line
+ ISDN subscriber number) to the Memory
Slot number allocated by CM71.

Y=0
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) Stored No.: XXXX + , + YYY...
XXXX : Access Code for ISDN
YYY... : ISDN Subscriber No. of
opposite office
(Maximum 16 digits)
NONE : No data

NOTE:

The data set by CM35 Y=40,

CM71>66, and CM72 is used to
verify the terminating number sent
from the opposite office.

END

198

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Example of the programming for Verification of Connection

PBX-A

ISDN SUBSCRIBER No.

(972) 555-6700

ISDN SUBSCRIBER No.

(972) 555-7800

TRK No. 000

TRK RT No. 00
CCH

ISDN TRUNK
(BRT/DTI/PRT)

TRK No. 000

TRK RT No. 00
ISDN
NETWORK

TRK No. 200

TRK RT No. 20
VIRTUAL TRUNK
(MATE-SIDE)

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(HOME-SIDE)

PBX-B

ISDN TRUNK
(BRT/DTI/PRT)

CCH

TRK No. 200

TRK RT No. 20

FOR
COMMON
SIGNALING
CHANNEL

TRK No. 100

TRK RT No. 10

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(MATE-SIDE)

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(HOME-SIDE)
TRK No. 100
TRK RT No. 10

ISDN SUBSCRIBER No.

(972) 555-6701

ISDN SUBSCRIBER No.

(972) 555-7801

TRK No. 001

TRK RT No. 01

TRK No. 001

TRK RT No. 01

STATION

STATION
ISDN TRUNK
(BRT/DTI/PRT)

ISDN
NETWORK

TRK No. 201

TRK RT No. 21
VIRTUAL TRUNK
(MATE-SIDE)

ISDN TRUNK
(BRT/DTI/PRT)
TRK No. 201
TRK RT No. 21

FOR
VOICE
CHANNEL

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(HOME-SIDE)

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(MATE-SIDE)

VIRTUAL TRUNK
(HOME-SIDE)

TRK No. 101

TRK RT No. 11

TRK No. 101

TRK RT No. 11

199

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Programming example for the PBX A in previous illustration;

CM35 Y=152

(1) 20: Mate-Side trunk route number for common signaling channel
(2) 0: Provide Verification of Connection
(1) 21: Mate-Side trunk route number for voice channel
(2) 0: Provide Verification of Connection

CM50 Y=06

(1) 200: Mate-Side trunk number for common signaling channel

(2) 9725556700: ISDN subscriber number of ISDN line used for common signaling channel
(1) 201: Mate-Side trunk number for voice channel
(2) 9725556701: ISDN subscriber number of ISDN line used for voice channel

CM35 Y=40

(1) 20: Mate-Side trunk route number for common signaling channel
(2) 00: Abbreviated Code for terminating number of the opposite office
(1) 21: Mate-Side trunk route number for voice channel
(2) 01: Abbreviated Code for terminating number of the opposite office

CM71

(1) 66: Memory slot allocation for terminating number of opposite office
(2) 000002: First memory slot number=000 + number of memory slot allocated=2

CM72 Y=0

(1) 000: Memory slot number

(2) 0,9725557800: ISDN access code=0 + opposite offices ISDN subscriber number used
for common signaling channel=9725557800
(1) 001: Memory slot number
(2) 0,9725557801: ISDN access code=0 + opposite offices ISDN subscriber number used
for voice channel=9725557801

200

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Programming example for the PBX B in previous illustration;

CM35 Y=152

(1) 20: Mate-Side trunk route number for common signaling channel
(2) 0: Provide Verification of Connection
(1) 21: Mate-Side trunk route number for voice channel
(2) 0: Provide Verification of Connection

CM50 Y=06

(1) 200: Mate-Side trunk number for common signaling channel

(2) 9725557800: ISDN subscriber number of ISDN line used for common signaling channel
(1) 201: Mate-Side trunk number for voice channel
(2) 9725557801: ISDN subscriber number of ISDN line used for voice channel

CM35 Y=40

(1) 20: Mate-Side trunk route number for common signaling channel
(2) 00: Abbreviated Code for terminating number of the opposite office
(1) 21: Mate-Side trunk route number for voice channel
(2) 01: Abbreviated Code for terminating number of the opposite office

CM71

(1) 66: Memory slot allocation for terminating number of opposite office
(2) 000002: First memory slot number=000 + number of memory slot allocated=2

CM72 Y=0

(1) 000: Memory slot number

(2) 0,9725556700: ISDN access code=0 + opposite offices ISDN subscriber number used
for common signaling channel=9725556700
(1) 001: Memory slot number
(2) 0,9725556701: ISDN access code=0 + opposite offices ISDN subscriber number used
for voice channel=9725556701

201

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

To connect the ISDN line for the voice channel after the called party answers, do the following programming.
By the following programming, the ISDN line for the voice channel is not connected, until the called
party answers, or when the called party does not answers the call.
NOTE:

This feature is available only for the connection between the 2000 IPS.
And the same programming must be set on the opposite office.

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM35

Specify the ISDN answer signal sending timing as when the called party answers.

Y=153
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. of Mate-Side
Trunk for voice channels
(2) 0: Send when the called party answers

Specify the kind of the Information Transfer

Capability of voice channel trunk route as
Speech.

Y=154
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. of Mate-Side
Trunk for voice channels
(2) 6: Speech

END

202

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Incoming Termination for Event Based CCIS Calls

START
CM76

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Convert received digits to Mate-Side trunks.

(1)

Y=01 Day Mode

Y=02 Night Mode
Y=03 Mode A
Y=04 Mode B
000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) BBBBBXXX: Mate-Side Trunk No. of
Virtual Trunk
XXX: 000-255

END

203

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Access Code/Terminating Number Assignment for Outgoing Event Based

Calls
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM71

Allocate memory to store the terminating numbers to the opposite office.

(1) 66
(2) XXX YYY
XXX: 000-299: First Memory Slot No.
YYY: 001-016 : Number of Memory Slot
allocated

CM72

Assign terminating numbers of the opposite

office (access code for ISDN line + ISDN subscriber number) to the Memory Slot number
allocated by CM71.

Y=0
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) Stored No.: XX + , + ZZZ...
XX
: Access Code for ISDN
ZZZ... : ISDN Subscriber No. of
Opposite Office
(Maximum 26 digits)
NONE : No data

END

204

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Release Timer for Virtual Tie Lines (Home-Side and Mate-Side Trunks)
START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM41

Specify the release timer for voice channels of

virtual tie line. If there are no calls for predetermined time, the voice channels used for
Event Based CCIS is released.

Y=0
(1) 87: Virtual Tie Line Release Timer
for Voice Channels
(2) 02: 2.4-4.8 seconds
(2.4 second increments)

30: 69.6-72.0 seconds

32: 24 seconds
(24 second increments)

70: 936 seconds

72: 1 minute
(1 minute increments)

99: 28 minutes
NONE : 3 minutes
(Error span: 2.4 seconds)
Specify the release timer for CCH channel of
virtual tie line. If all the voice channels are released and there are no calls for predetermined
time, the CCH channel used for Event Based
CCIS is released.

Y=0
(1) 89: Virtual Tie Line Release Timer
for Common Signaling Channel
(2) 02: 2.4-4.8 seconds
(2.4 second increments)

30: 69.6-72.0 seconds

32: 24 seconds
(24 second increments)

70: 936 seconds

72: 1 minute
(1 minute increments)

99: 28 minutes
NONE : 3 minutes
(Error span: 2.4 seconds)
END

205

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

CCH Data Assignment

START

DESCRIPTION

CM05

Assign an AP number to the CCH card (PNSC00/PN-DTA/PN-DTB).

The AP number must match the SENSE switch
setting on the CCH card.
INITIAL

Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 11: CCH Card

CM06

Assign a CCH channel number to each CCH

card.
INITIAL

Y=07
(1) 0-7: CCH channel No.
(2) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of CCH Card

CMA7

Assign the trunk number for common signaling channel on the Home-Side trunk used as
the common signaling channel.

Y=00
(1) 0-7: CCH channel No.
(2) 000-255: Trunk No. assigned by CM07

Assign an Originating Point Code (OPC) of

own office and Destination Point Code (DPC)
of opposite office, to each CCH channel.
INITIAL

Y=01
(1) 0-7: CCH channel No.
(2) 00001-16367: OPC

NOTE:

CMA8

DATA

The OPC is used to designate an

originating office in the No. 7 CCIS
network. A single OPC of own office
should be assigned to all CCH channels provided in the same system.

Y=02
(1) 0-7: CCH channel No.
(2) 00001-16367: DPC

Assign ACM signal waiting timer.

Y=10
(1) 0-7: CCH channel No.
(2) 14: 28 seconds

Assign CCH channel to which a signaling message is transferred according to the Destination
Point Code (DPC) received.

(1) 00001-16367: DPC

(2) 0-7: CCH channel No.

END

206

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Tandem Connection Programming

When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to CCIS/CCIS to ISDN), do the following programming.
START

DESCRIPTION

CM36

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

NOTE:

CM08

DATA

The Home-Side Virtual Tie line

routes must be included for all Tandem combinations.

Tandem connection by station or attendant.

Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk Route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted
(1) 028
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

END

207

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Closed Numbering Programming

START

DESCRIPTION

DATA

CM8A

Assign LCR Group number to Area Code Development Pattern.

Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group No.
(2) 4000-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No.

Assign Area Code Development Pattern number.

Y=4000-4007
(1) X...XXX: Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No.

Assign Route Pattern.

Y=0000-0255
(1) 1-4: 1st-4th Order
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR/TR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

CM85

Assign maximum number of sending digits.

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7
(1) X...XX: Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)
(2) 01-79 : Maximum number of sending digits

END

208

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Event Based CCIS Trunk Data Table

The following table shows the required trunk data to each channel for Event Based CCIS.

Event Based CCIS Trunk Data Table

: Initial Data
Channel
Type

Setting
Data

Virtual Trunk of Event Based CCIS

Home-Side Trunk
Voice
Channel

Common
Signaling
Channel

ISDN Trunk

Mate-Side Trunk
Voice
Channel

Common
Signaling
Channel

PRI Trunk
B
Channel

BRI Trunk

D
Channel

B
Channel

CM30
Y=07

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

000-029:
CIC 000-029

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

CM30
Y=19

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

X-XXXX:
Trunk No. of
opposite
office

X-XXXX:
Trunk No. of
opposite
office

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

CM30
Y=35

001-127:
CIC 001-127

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

CM35
Y=00

04:
Tie Line
Trunk

04:
Tie Line
Trunk

04:
Tie Line
Trunk

04:
Tie Line
Trunk

00:
ISDN Trunk

15 :
Not used

00:
ISDN Trunk

CM35
Y=01

2:
DP 10 PPS

2:
DP 10 PPS

7 :
DP/DTMF

7 :
DP/DTMF

7 :
DP/DTMF

7 :
DP/DTMF

2-7 :
DP 10 PPSDP/DTMF

CM35
Y=04

2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
7 :
Answer signal Answer signal Answer signal Answer signal Answer signal Answer signal Answer signal
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
does not
arrive

CM35
Y=05

1 :
1 :
1 :
1 :
1 :
1 :
1 :
Release signal Release signal Release signal Release signal Release signal Release signal Release signal
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives
arrives

CM35
Y=09

06:
2nd DT/
Timing Start

06:
2nd DT/
Timing Start

15 :
Ring Down
(Loop Start
C.O. line)

15 :
Ring Down
(Loop Start
C.O. line)

08:
ISDN

15 :
Ring Down
(Loop Start
C.O. line)

08:
ISDN

CM35
Y=12

3 :
4 digits

3 :
4 digits

3 :
4 digits

3 :
4 digits

0-3 :
1-4 digits

3 :
4 digits

0-3 :
1-4 digits
Continued on next page

209

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

EVENT BASED CCIS PROGRAMMING

Event Based CCIS Trunk Data Table

: Initial Data
Channel
Type

Virtual Trunk of Event Based CCIS

Home-Side Trunk

ISDN Trunk

Mate-Side Trunk

PRI Trunk

Voice
Channel

Common
Signaling
Channel

Voice
Channel

Common
Signaling
Channel

CM35
Y=18

1 :
Not provided

1 :
Not provided

1 :
Not provided

CM35
Y=19

0-7 :
PAD
Pattern 0-7

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

CM35
Y=40

31 :
Abbreviated
Code 31

CM35
Y=79

BRI Trunk

B
Channel

D
Channel

B
Channel

1 :
Not provided

0/1 :
To provide/
Not provided

1 :
Not provided

0/1 :
To provide/
Not provided

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

7 :
PAD
Pattern 7

31 :
Abbreviated
Code 31

00-31 :
Abbreviated
Code 00-31

00-31 :
Abbreviated
Code 00-31

31 :
Abbreviated
Code 31

31 :
Abbreviated
Code 31

31 :
Abbreviated
Code 31

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

1 :
Point-toMultipoint

0/1 :
Point-toPoint/
Point-toMultipoint

CM35
Y=90

0:
No. 7 CCIS

0:
No. 7 CCIS

7 :
Not used

7 :
Not used

3:
ISDN-PRI

3:
ISDN-PRI

2:
ISDN-BRI

CM35
Y=91

0-7:
CCH0-7

0-7:
CCH0-7

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

NONE :
No data

CM35
Y=93

15/NONE
Not used

00-07:
DCH0-7

15/NONE
Not used

CM35
Y=135

0:
Event Based
CCIS route

0:
Event Based
CCIS route

0:
Event Based
CCIS route

0:
Event Based
CCIS route

1 :
Other Trunk
route

1 :
Other Trunk
route

1 :
Other Trunk
route

CM35
Y=143

1 :
By dialed-in
digits

1 :
By dialed-in
digits

0/1 :
By subaddress/By
dialed-in
digits

0/1 :
By subaddress/By
dialed-in
digits

0/1 :
By subaddress/By
dialed-in
digits

1 :
By dialed-in
digits

0/1 :
By subaddress/By
dialed-in
digits

Setting
Data

15/NONE
Not used

15/NONE
Not used

15/NONE
Not used

210

15/NONE
Not used

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

CHAPTER 4
CIRCUIT CARD
INFORMATION

This chapter explains the mounting location, the meaning of lamp indications, and the switch settings of each ISDN circuit card.

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER .............................................. 212

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS ......................... 213
LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS .................................... 217
PN-BRTA (BRT) .............................................................................
PN-2BRTC (BRT) ...........................................................................
PN-2BRTK (BRT) ...........................................................................
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) ........................................................................
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) ..........................................................................
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) ..........................................................................
PN-24PRTA (PRT) ..........................................................................
PN-30PRTA (PRT) ..........................................................................
PN-DTA (PRT) ................................................................................
PN-DTB (PRT) ................................................................................
PN-SC00 (CCH) ..............................................................................
PN-DTA (CCH) ................................................................................
PN-DTB (CCH) ................................................................................
PN-SC01 (DCH) ..............................................................................
PN-SC03-B (ICH) ............................................................................
PZ-M542 (CONN) ............................................................................
PZ-M557 (CONN) ............................................................................
PN-2ILCA (ILC) ...............................................................................
PN-2ILCC (ILC) ...............................................................................

211

218
223
228
233
241
248
254
262
269
276
283
286
292
298
301
303
305
307
310

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

This chapter explains the following items about each circuit card used in this system. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application
Processor, and Line/Trunk).
(1)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout.

(2)

Lamp Indications
The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in
a table.

(3)

Switch Settings
The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a
table.

Each switch setting table has a CHECK column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during
and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent system maintenance and operations.

212

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards for the ISDN system.

Regular PIM
The figure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the regular PIM.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Regular PIM)

PFT

MP12/FP12

LT11/AP11

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM
0-7

AC/DC
PWR
*1

LTC1

LTC0

*2

*3

LTC2

*4

LTC3

BWB

DC/DC
PWR

FRONT
LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots
AP00-AP11: Application Processor card mounting slots
MP12
: PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D mounting slot
FP12
: PN-CP15 mounting slot

VM

: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M/VM03-M
mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR: PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR: PZ-PW122 mounting slot

*1 The following application processor cards are mounted in the AP00-AP11 slots of PIM0-7. NOTE
PN-BRTA/PN-2BRTC/PN-2BRTK/PN-4BRTA-A (BRT),
PN-24DTA-C/PN-30DTC-C (DTI),
PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-DTA/PN-DTB (PRT), PN-SC00/PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH),
PN-SC01 (DCH), PN-SC03-B (ICH)
*2 PN-2ILCC (ILC) card is mounted in the AP00-AP07 slots of PIM0-7.
*3 PN-2ILCA (ILC) card is mounted in the LT00-LT07 slots of PIM0-7.
*4 PZ-M542/PZ-M557 (CONN) card is mounted into the LTC0-LTC3 connectors on the PIM which
accommodates the 30DTI/30PRT card.
Continued on next page

213

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

NOTE:

Maximum of six PN-4BRTA-A cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards per system.
For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only line/trunk cards can be mounted in
any slot of LT00-LT11 slots of each PIM.
EXAMPLE: When mounting three PN-4BRTA-A cards in PIM0-7

The same number of slots as

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots:

06

07

08

09

10

11

12
PFT

05

MP/FP

4BRT card

04

line/trunk card

4BRT card

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots

03

line/trunk card

02

line/trunk card

01

4BRT card

VM
PIM0-7

00

The rest of slots:

The other application processor cards
and line/trunk cards can be mounted

Only line/trunk
cards can be
mounted

214

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

PIM for Backup CPU System

The figure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the PIM0 for the Backup CPU system.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

PFT

MP00

MP01

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)

AC/DC
PWR
*1

LTC0

*2

LTC1

*3

LTC2

*4

LTC3

BWB

DC/DC
PWR

FRONT
LT00-LT10 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots
AP00-AP10 : Application Processor card mounting slots
MP00/MP01: PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B mounting slot
VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M/VM03-M
mounting slot

PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR: PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR: PZ-PW122 mounting slot

*1 The following application processor cards are mounted in the AP00-AP10 slots of PIM0. NOTE
PN-BRTA/PN-2BRTC/PN-2BRTK/PN-4BRTA-A (BRT),
PN-24DTA-C/PN-30DTC-C (DTI),
PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-DTA/PN-DTB (PRT), PN-SC00/PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH),
PN-SC01 (DCH), PN-SC03-B (ICH)
*2 PN-2ILCC (ILC) card is mounted in the AP00-AP07 slots of PIM0.
*3 PN-2ILCA (ILC) card is mounted in the LT00-LT07 slots of PIM0.
*4 PZ-M542/PZ-M557 (CONN) card is mounted into the LTC0-LTC3 connectors on the PIM0 which
accommodates the 30DTI/30PRT card.
Continued on next page

215

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/13/2007

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

NOTE:

Maximum of six PN-4BRTA-A cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards per system.
For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only line/trunk cards can be mounted in
any slot of LT00-LT10 slots of PIM0.
EXAMPLE: When mounting three PN-4BRTA-A cards in PIM0
07

08

09

10

11

12
PFT

The same number of slots as

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots:

06

MP

05

MP

4BRT card

04

line/trunk card

4BRT card

PN-4BRTA-A
cards mounting
slots

03

line/trunk card

02

line/trunk card

01

4BRT card

VM

PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)

00

The rest of slots:

The other application processor
cards and line/trunk cards can
be mounted

Only line/trunk
cards can be
mounted

216

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS

LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS

The table below shows the required circuit cards to be explained in this section.

List of Required Circuit Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
REFERENCE
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT ALLOWED

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Page 218

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Page 223

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Page 228

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Page 233

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Page 241

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Page 248

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Page 254

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Page 262

PN-DTA (PRT)

Page 269

PN-DTB (PRT)

Page 276

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Page 283

PN-DTA (CCH)

Page 286

PN-DTB (CCH)

Page 292

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Page 298

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Page 301

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Page 303

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Page 305

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Page 307

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Page 310

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

*MB=Make Busy

217

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-BRTA (BRT)

PN-BRTA (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS
RUN
MB

B1
B2
D
ALM

SW0

SW1

218

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B1

Green

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

B2

ALM

Green

Green

Red

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

219

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be

set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON

1
1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

DOWN

For normal operation

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW0-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Clock signal is sent to the PLO0 of MP

card.

OFF

Clock signal is sent to the PLO1 of MP

card.

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used
Continued on next page

220

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Dip SW)

ON

ON
1 2

FUNCTION

CHECK

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

221

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

NOTE 3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows:

BRT0

BRT1

BRT2

----

BRT11

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
SW SW
---0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3
0-2 0-3
When one
BRT is
provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the

clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON
Should a clock failure occur
with BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

222

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW11
SW10
SW0

223

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No.1 Circuit

B11

D1

Red

Green

ALM1

Red

B20

Red

B10

D0

ALM0

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

224

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW11-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

1
1 2

For normal operation

Continued on next page

225

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW11 (Dip SW)

1
ON

1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW11-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Output clock signals to the PLO0 of

MP card.

OFF

Output clock signals to the PLO1 of

MP card.

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

226

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS

When one BRT

is provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

BRT1

BRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

----

BRT23

----

SW SW
11-2 11-3

REMARKS

MP card will receive the

clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
Should a clock failure occur
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the

clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

227

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW10
SW11

SW0

228

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No.1 Circuit

B11

D1

Red

Green

ALM1

Red

B20

Red

B10

D0

ALM0

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

229

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW11-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

1
1 2

For normal operation

Continued on next page

230

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW11 (Dip SW)

1
ON

1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW11-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Output clock signals to the PLO0 of

MP card.

OFF

Output clock signals to the PLO1 of

MP card.

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

231

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS

When one BRT

is provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

BRT1

BRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

----

BRT23

----

SW SW
11-2 11-3

REMARKS

MP card will receive the

clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
Should a clock failure occur
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the

clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

232

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
SW4

SW0

SW1
SW2

SW3

B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0

B23
B13
D3
ALM3
B22
B12
D2
ALM2

CN2

233

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B23

Red

No.3 Circuit

B13

D3

Red

Green

ALM3

Red

B22

Red

B12

D2

ALM2

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.2 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
Continued on next page

234

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

LAMP
NAME
B21

B11

D1

COLOR
Red

Green

Red

B20

Red

D0

ALM0

No.1 Circuit

Red

ALM1

B10

FUNCTION

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

235

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW4-8: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation

Continued on next page

236

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW4 (Piano SW)

Output clock signals to PLO0/PLO1 of MP card. NOTE 3

OFF

FUNCTION

SW No.

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON

CHECK

Circuit No.

No.0

No.1

No.2

No.3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PLO0

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PLO0

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PLO0

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

PLO0

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PLO0

PLO1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Not allowed

ON

Output clock signals according to the

switch setting of SW4-1 to SW4-4.

OFF

Output clock signals to the reverse PLO

route of the switch setting of SW4-1 to
SW4-4.

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

5
NOTE 3

Continued on next page

237

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)

ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

1 2

SW1 (Dip SW)

ON

FUNCTION

1 2

Continued on next page

238

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)

ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.2
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.2
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.3
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.3
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)

1 2

SW3 (Dip SW)

ON

FUNCTION

1 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

239

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW4-1 to SW4-5 as follows.

CONDITIONS

When one BRT is

provided.

When more than

one BRT is provided.

SWITCH

BRT0

BRT1

BRT2

SW4-1

ON

SW4-2

OFF

SW4-3

OFF

SW4-4

OFF

SW4-5

ON

SW4-1

----

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

SW4-2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-3

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-5

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

----

BRT23

OFF

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

240

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS

MB
SW1

JP1
SW0
AISS
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL

JPR0
JPS
JRR1

241

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)

errors.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received. The distant

office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy

: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

242

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

0-3

F
4

FUNCTION

UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation

Continued on next page

243

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable

length between the PBX and the C.O.
or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 6
OFF
8

OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

244

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

4
3
2
1

CHECK

[North America only]

ON

NOTE 4

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is not provided.

RIGHT

Line impedance: 100

LEFT

Line impedance: 110

4
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

JPS (Jumper pin)

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is not provided.
Continued on next page

245

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

MAS (Jumper pin)

DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin)

Always set to DOWN

UP

AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

or power on.

DOWN

AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.

JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT

Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

246

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
DTI0
CONDITIONS

When one DTI is

provided.

When more than

one DTI is provided.

DTI1

DTI2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

DTI7
SW SW
0-1 0-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at its
PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from DTI0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with DTI0, MP card will
automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

247

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW

PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL

JP1

JPS
JPR
JP

248

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time

slot 16.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being

received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy

: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 to 10 channels are busy

249

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW-8: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW-8: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation

Continued on next page

250

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
3
ON

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Transmission line cable:

Coaxial cable (75 )

OFF

Transmission line cable:

Twisted-pair cable (120 )

OFF

OFF

FUNCTION

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

251

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT

LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)

JP
(Jumper pin)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)

DOWN

RA is grounded on the transmission line

(For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Line impedance: 120

(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1
(Jumper pin)
DOWN

Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

252

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

NOTE 3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0
CONDITIONS

When one DTI is

provided.

When more than

one DTI is
provided.

DTI1

DTI2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

DTI7
SW SW
-1 -2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with DTI0, MP card will
automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets from
DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

253

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS

MB
SW1

JP1
SW0
AISS

SW2

JPR0

LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL

JPS
JRR1

254

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.

LPB

Not used

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)

errors.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy

: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

NOTE 1

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05. NOTE 3

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

Continued on next page

255

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

1
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 4

ON

3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6

For normal operation

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

Continued on next page

256

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF
ON

FUNCTION
Set equalizer according to the cable
length between the PBX and the C.O. or
CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

7
NOTE 6
OFF
8

OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON

CHECK

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

257

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON

DTI mode

OFF

PRT mode

OFF

Not used

CHECK

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

[North America only]

ON

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
Continued on next page

258

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

OFF

FUNCTION

CHECK

Always set to OFF

[North America only for AT&T]

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ON

Deletion of Area Code on

International Outgoing call

OFF

No deletion of Area Code on

International Outgoing call

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

Continued on next page

259

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

JPS (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is not provided.

RIGHT

Line impedance: 100

LEFT

Line impedance: 110

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is not provided.

DOWN

Always set to DOWN

MAS (Jumper pin)

AISS (Jumper pin)

UP

AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

or power on.

DOWN

AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.

JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT

Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
Continued on next page

260

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93 (for the expanded
PRT card), be sure to set the switch number of all the PRT cards accommodated with the SENSE
switch/SW1-4 to 31, and to assign any one number from AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT
card (same even if the site that accommodates the PRT card is different).
NOTE 4: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT is

provided.

When more than

one PRT is provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
SW SW
0-1 0-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with PRT0, MP card will
automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets
clock from PRT1.

NOTE 5: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

261

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW

JP1

JPS

SW1

LC
LPB
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL

JPR
JP

262

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.

LPB

Not used

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time

slot 16.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being

received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy

: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 to 10 channels are busy

263

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05. NOTE 3

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW-8: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW-8: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation

Continued on next page

264

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 4

3
ON

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Transmission line cable:

Coaxial cable (75 )

OFF

Transmission line cable:

Twisted-pair cable (120 )

OFF

OFF

FUNCTION

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

265

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

CHECK

Continued on next page

266

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT

LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)

JP
(Jumper pin)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)

DOWN

RA is grounded on the transmission line

(For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Line impedance: 120

(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1 (Jumper pin)

DOWN

Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93 (for the expanded
PRT card), be sure to set the switch number of all the PRT cards accommodated with the SENSE
switch/SW1-4 to 31, and to assign any one number from AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT
card (same even if the site that accommodates the PRT card is different).
Continued on next page

267

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 4: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT is

provided.

When more than

one PRT is
provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
REMARKS

SW SW
-1 -2

MP card will receive the

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure
occur with PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch
to the PLO1 input which
gets clock from PRT1.

NOTE 5: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

268

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTA (PRT)

PN-DTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3

MB
SW1

SW2

JP3
JP2

JPRI

JP1

JPR

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

JPT

269

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time

slot 16 (Only for E1).

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors

(Only for T1).

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
: More than 10 channels are busy
OFF
: All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM): 2 through 10 channels are busy

NOTE:

The following table shows the lamps of PN-DTA card used for T1/E1 interface.
: Used : Not used

LAMP
RUN
LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM

PRT (T1)

PRT (E1)

LAMP
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

270

PRT (T1)

PRT (E1)

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05. NOTE 3

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

[North America only]

4
3
2
1
ON

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
Continued on next page

271

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 4
NOTE 5
2
NOTE 4
NOTE 5

ON

3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7

FUNCTION

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON
5
NOTE 7
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 7
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable

length between the PBX and the C.O. or
CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 7
OFF
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

CHECK

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

272

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

JP1 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON

T1 mode

OFF

E1 mode

ON

PRT mode

OFF

DTI mode

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

1
2

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2 (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

RIGHT

CHECK

Line impedance is set by combing JP1

and JP2
JP1
LEFT
LEFT
RIGHT
RIGHT

JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT

LINE IMPEDANCE
100 (for T1)
110 (for T1)
120 (for E1)
75 (for E1)

LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

Balanced transmission (For twisted-pair

cable) (for T1/E1)
Unbalanced transmission (For coaxial
cable) (for E1)
Continued on next page

273

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JPRI (Jumper pin)

LEFT

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

Not used

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is provided

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is not provided

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is provided

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is not provided

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93 (for the expanded
PRT card), be sure to set the switch number of all the PRT cards accommodated with the SENSE
switch/SW1-4 to 31, and to assign any one number from AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT
card (same even if the site that accommodates the PRT card is different).

274

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (PRT)

NOTE 4: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT is

provided.

When more than

one PRT is provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
SW SW
2-1 2-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with PRT0, MP card will
automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets
clock from PRT1.

NOTE 5: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the PRT cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 6: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

275

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

PN-DTB (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3

MB
SW1

SW2

JP3
JP2

JPRI

JP1

JPR

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

JPT

276

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time

slot 16 (Only for E1).

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors

(Only for T1).

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
: More than 10 channels are busy
OFF
: All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM): 2 through 10 channels are busy

NOTE:

The following table shows the lamps of PN-DTB card used for T1/E1 interface.
: Used : Not used

LAMP
RUN
LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM

PRT (T1)

PRT (E1)

LAMP
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

277

PRT (T1)

PRT (E1)

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05. NOTE 3

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

[North America only]

4
3
2
1
ON

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
Continued on next page

278

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 4
NOTE 5
2
NOTE 4
NOTE 5

ON

3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7

FUNCTION

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON
5
NOTE 7
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 7
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable

length between the PBX and the C.O. or
CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 7
OFF
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

CHECK

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

279

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
T1 mode

OFF

E1 mode

ON

PRT mode

OFF

DTI mode

ON

A-law/-law conversion (for Taiwan)

NOTE 8, NOTE 9

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2 (Jumper pin)

CHECK

ON

JP1 (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

RIGHT

Line impedance is set by combing JP1

and JP2
JP1
LEFT
LEFT
RIGHT
RIGHT

JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT

LINE IMPEDANCE
100 (for T1)
110 (for T1)
120 (for E1)
75 (for E1)

LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

Balanced transmission (For twisted-pair

cable) (for T1/E1)
Unbalanced transmission (For coaxial
cable) (for E1)
Continued on next page

280

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JPRI (Jumper pin)

LEFT

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

Not used

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is provided

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is not provided

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is provided

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is not provided

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93 (for the expanded
PRT card), be sure to set the switch number of all the PRT cards accommodated with the SENSE
switch/SW1-4 to 31, and to assign any one number from AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT
card (same even if the site that accommodates the PRT card is different).
Continued on next page

281

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (PRT)

NOTE 4: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT is

provided.

When more than

one PRT is provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
SW SW
2-1 2-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with PRT0, MP card will
automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets
clock from PRT1.

NOTE 5: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the PRT cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 6: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 8: This switch setting is required when providing A-law/-law conversion for PRT in Taiwan. And
for PRT, A-law/-law setting by CMAA Y=17 is required in addition to the switch setting (Setting SW3-3 to ON).
NOTE 9: To provide A-law/-law conversion for PRT, the firmware program SC-3712 IPS PRTDA
PROG-B1 or later is required.

282

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-SC00 (CCH)

PN-SC00 (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1

SENS
RUN
MB

SW0
LC
LPB

RS

To Modem
( For Analog Interface)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.

283

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/01/2006

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW0-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

OFF

4
3
2
1
ON

ON

Loopback test

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Analog interface

OFF

Digital interface

ON

RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) ON

NOTE 3

OFF

RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)

OFF

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

For normal operation

Continued on next page

284

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-SC00 (CCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

OFF
ON

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-3

SW
1-4

SW
1-5

48 Kbps NOTE 4

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

48 Kbps NOTE 4

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

56 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

64 Kbps

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Common channel signaling data

transmission speed (For Analog Interface)

ON

OFF
ON

CHECK

Common channel signaling data

transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

ON

1
ON

FUNCTION

Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to

OFF.

OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface).
NOTE 4: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW1-3: OFF

SW1-3: ON

48 Kbps
1

48 Kbps
1

Data

1
Data

285

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-DTA (CCH)

PN-DTA (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3

MB
SW1

SW2

JP3
JP2

JPRI

JP1

JPR

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

JPT

286

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTA (CCH)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Not used

MFRM

Not used

FRM

Not used

MRMT

Not used

RMT

Not used

CRC

Not used

AIS

Not used

BL

Not used

287

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTA (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

Continued on next page

288

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTA (CCH)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Local loopback

OFF

For normal operation

1-3, 5-8

OFF

Not used

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

Always set to ON

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON

SW3 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5
OFF
ON
6

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
3-5

SW
3-6

48 Kbps (1) NOTE 3

OFF

ON

48 Kbps (2) NOTE 3

OFF

OFF

56 Kbps

ON

OFF

64 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF
7

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

Continued on next page

289

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (CCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JP1 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

RIGHT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

JP2 (Jumper pin)

JP3 (Jumper pin)

JPRI (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

290

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTA (CCH)

NOTE 3: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW3-6: ON

SW3-6: OFF

48 Kbps (1)
1

48 Kbps (2)
1

Data

1
Data

291

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTB (CCH)

PN-DTB (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3

MB
SW1

SW2

JP3
JP2

JPRI

JP1

JPR

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

JPT

292

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (CCH)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Not used

MFRM

Not used

FRM

Not used

MRMT

Not used

RMT

Not used

CRC

Not used

AIS

Not used

BL

Not used

293

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

Continued on next page

294

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Local loopback

OFF

For normal operation

1-3, 5-8

OFF

Not used

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

Always set to ON

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON

SW3 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5
OFF
ON
6

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
3-5

SW
3-6

48 Kbps (1) NOTE 3

OFF

ON

48 Kbps (2) NOTE 3

OFF

OFF

56 Kbps

ON

OFF

64 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF
7

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

Continued on next page

295

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JP1 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

RIGHT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

JP2 (Jumper pin)

JP3 (Jumper pin)

JPRI (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

296

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-DTB (CCH)

NOTE 3: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW3-6: ON

SW3-6: OFF

48 Kbps (1)
1

48 Kbps (2)
1

Data

1
Data

297

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/13/2007

PN-SC01 (DCH)

PN-SC01 (DCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1

SENS
RUN
MB

SW0
LC
LPB

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Not used

298

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

SW0-4: ON

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

Continued on next page

299

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-SC01 (DCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

SW1 (Dip SW)

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHECK

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

300

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

PN-SC03-B (ICH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

DOPE7

Green

Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE6

Green

Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE5

Green

Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE4

Green

Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE3

Green

Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE2

Green

Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE1

Green

Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE0

Green

Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.

301

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

SW1-4: ON

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

302

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PZ-M542 (CONN)

PZ-M542 (CONN)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RCV21

JP1

To Champ
Connector (MDF)

LTC

JP2

TRS21

FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT

RCV11
LT

TRS01

JP0

RCV01

TRS11

FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT

To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM

FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

303

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP1

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2

RIGHT
LEFT

FUNCTION

CHECK

For coaxial connectors

(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

304

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PZ-M557 (CONN)

PZ-M557 (CONN)

JP2

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT

TRS20

RCV10

JP1
JP0

LTC

TRS10
To Champ
Connector (MDF)

RCV20

FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT

RCV00

FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT

LT

To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM

TRS00

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

305

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP1

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2

RIGHT
LEFT

FUNCTION

CHECK

For coaxial connectors

(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

306

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

ACT1
PAL1
LPB1
B21
B11
ACT0
PAL0
LPB0
B20
B10

SW1

SW0

307

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

ACT1

Green

No.1
Circuit

PAL1

Red

ON : Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.

LPB1

Red

OFF: Not used.

B21

Red

ON
: B2 channel is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.

B11

Red

ON
: B1 channel is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.

ACT0

Green

PAL0

Red

ON : Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.

LPB0

Red

OFF: Not used

B20

Red

ON
: B2 channel is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.

B10

Red

ON
: B1 channel is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.

No. 0
Circuit

ON : Normally operating.
OFF: Not operating.

ON : Normally operating.
OFF: Not operating.

308

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
JULY/01/2006

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

SW0
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON
1
OFF

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

ON
2
OFF

ON

ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF

CHECK

No.0
Circuit
(Receiving)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.0
Circuit
(Sending)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.1
Circuit
(Receiving)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.1
Circuit
(Sending)

Terminating register is
provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure
and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

309

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

PN-2ILCC (ILC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
SW2
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
PFA1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
PFA0
SW1

SW0

310

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No. 1 Circuit B2 channel status

ON
: Busy
OFF
: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy

B11

Red

B1 channel status
ON
: Busy
OFF
: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy

D1

Green

D channel status
ON
: Link is connected
OFF
: Link is not connected

ALM1

Red

Transmission line fault status

ON
: Line fault
OFF
: Normal operation

PFA1

Red

Power status
ON
OFF

: Power failure
: Normal operation
Continued on next page

311

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

B20

Red

No. 0 Circuit B2 channel status

ON
: Busy
OFF
: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy

B10

Red

B1 channel status
ON
: Busy
OFF
: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy

D0

Green

D channel status
ON
: Link is connected
OFF
: Link is not connected

ALM0

Red

Transmission line fault status

ON
: Line fault
OFF
: Normal operation

PFA0

Red

Power status
ON
OFF

312

: Power failure
: Normal operation

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW4-8: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW2 (Piano SW)

ON

Remote loopback (No. 0 Circuit)

OFF

Normal operation

ON

Remote loopback (No. 1 Circuit)

OFF

Normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

ON

For normal operation

Continued on next page

313

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)

ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

1 2

SW1 (Dip SW)

ON

FUNCTION

1 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

314

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch4002.fm
SEPTEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

CHAPTER 5
OPERATION TEST

This chapter explains the operation test to be performed after you completed
the installation of ISDN. For fault diagnosis by MAT or CAT, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST ........................... 316

PLO OPERATION TEST ........................................................... 324

315

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

To confirm inter-office synchronization and speech quality using In-Service transmission lines, do the
following steps.
STEP1: Connect the transmission line to the MDF or CONN card.
STEP2: Make busy the channels except the channel tested by CME5.
STEP3: Confirm indication lamps on the DTI/PRT/BRT card, as per the following table.
Alarm Indications on 24DTI
Page 317
Alarm Indications on 30DTI
Page 318
Alarm Indications on 24PRT
Page 319
Alarm Indications on 30PRT
Page 320
Alarm Indications on BRT
Page 322
STEP4: Originate an outgoing call via trunk.
STEP5: After an outgoing connection via trunks has been established, confirm the inter-office synchronization as follows:
On the DTMF telephone set, keep pressing any dial button.
Check to see if there are noise or abnormal tones.
Do the above test again in the opposite direction.
STEP6: Repeat the test for all channels. When completed, make idle all channels by CME5.

316

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on 24DTI

LED
RUN

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE
Abnormal operation of DTI card

ACTION
1
2

3
4
CRC

PCM

FRM

RMT

AIS

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

On

Bit Error Rate

exceeds the predetermined value

No PCM signals
arrive from the distant office

Frame Alignment
signals from the
distant office cannot be received

Frame Alignment
signals cannot be
sent to the remote
PBX

Remote PBX is in
the local loopback
state

317

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0/Y=1, CM07 Y=01.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote DTI card.
Check to see if the line is correctly
connected to the DTI card.
Plug and unplug the DTI card.
Repeat this two or three times.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote DTI card.
Check the transmission line and
external equipment.
Replace the DTI card.

Check the switch settings of the remote

DTI card.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on 30DTI

LED
RUN

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE
Abnormal operation of DTI card

ACTION
1
2

3
4
PCM

FRM

MFRM

RMT

MRMT

AIS

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

On

On

No PCM signals
arrive from the distant office

Frame Alignment
signals from the
distant office cannot be received

Multi Frame Alignment signals from

the distant office
cannot be received

Frame Alignment
signals cannot be
sent to the remote
PBX

Multi Frame Alignment signals cannot

be sent to the
remote PBX

Remote PBX is in
the local loopback
state

318

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0/Y=1, CM07 Y=01.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.
Check to see if the line is correctly
connected to the DTI card.
Plug and unplug the DTI card.
Repeat this two or three times.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote DTI card.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote DTI card.
Check the transmission line and
external equipment.
Replace the DTI card.
Confirm the switch setting on the
DTI card indicating an alarm.
Replace the DTI card not indicating an alarm, with a spare.

Check the switch settings of the remote

DTI card.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on 24PRT

LED
RUN

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE
Abnormal operation of PRT card

ACTION
1
2

3
4
LC

On

Off

ISDN Primary Rate

D-channel data link
connection failure

CRC

Off

On

Bit Error Rate

exceeds the predetermined value

No PCM signals
arrive from the distant office

Frame Alignment
signals from the
distant office cannot be received

Frame Alignment
signals cannot be
sent to the remote
PBX

PCM

FRM

RMT

AIS

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

Remote PBX is in
the local loopback
state

319

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0/Y=1, CM07 Y=01.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.

Check the status of the local office line

or public network line.

Check the receive line and external equipment.

Replace the remote PRT card.
Check to see if the line is correctly
connected to the PRT card.
Plug and unplug the PRT card.
Repeat this two or three times.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote PRT card.
Check the transmission line and
external equipment.
Replace the PRT card.

Check the switch settings of the remote

PRT card.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on 30PRT

LED
RUN

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE
Abnormal operation of PRT card

ACTION
1
2

3
4
LC

On

Off

ISDN Primary Rate

D-channel data link
connection failure

PCM

Off

On

No PCM signals
arrive from the distant office

Frame Alignment
signals from the
distant office cannot be received

Multi Frame Alignment signals from

the distant office
cannot be received

Frame Alignment
signals cannot be
sent to the remote
PBX

FRM

MFRM

RMT

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0/Y=1, CM07 Y=01.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.

Check the status of the local office line

or public network line.

Check to see if the line is correctly

connected to the PRT card.
Plug and unplug the PRT card.
Repeat this two or three times.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote PRT card.
Check the receive line and external equipment.
Replace the remote PRT card.
Check the transmission line and
external equipment.
Replace the PRT card.
Continued on next page

320

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on 30PRT

LED
MRMT

AIS

LED INDICATION

FAULT

NORMAL

FAULT

CAUSE

Off

On

Multi Frame Alignment signals cannot

be sent to the
remote PBX

Off

On

Remote PBX is in
the local loopback
state

321

ACTION
1
2

Confirm the switch setting on the

PRT card indicating an alarm.
Replace the PRT card not indicating an alarm, with a spare.

Check the switch settings of the remote

PRT card.

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on BRT

LED

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE

ACTION

BRT
RUN

Abnormal operation of BRT card

1
2

3
4
ALM

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0, CM07 Y=02.
Check to see if the SENS switch is
set as per the AP number (04-15)
assigned by CM05 Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.

Off

On

Transmission line
fault

1
2

Confirm circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

Abnormal operation of BRT card

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0, CM07 Y=02.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.

2BRT
RUN

3
4
ALM0

Off

On

No. 0 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 0 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

ALM1

Off

On

No. 1 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 1 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.
Continued on next page

322

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

INTEROFFICE TRANSMISSION LINE TEST

Alarm Indications on BRT

LED

LED INDICATION
NORMAL

FAULT

Flash
(120 IPM)

On or Off

FAULT
CAUSE

ACTION

4BRT
RUN

Abnormal operation of BRT card

1
2

3
4

Confirm the programming data:

CM05 Y=0/Y=1, CM07 Y=02.
Check to see if the SENSE switch
is set as per the AP number (0415, 20-31) assigned by CM05
Y=0.
Reset the MB switch
(DownUpDown)
If the fault cannot be cleared,
replace the card.

ALM0

Off

On

No. 0 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 0 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

ALM1

Off

On

No. 1 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 1 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

ALM2

Off

On

No. 2 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 2 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

ALM3

Off

On

No. 3 circuit transmission line fault

1
2

Confirm No. 3 circuit line status.

Confirm PSTN line status.

323

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

To confirm the PLO operation, do the following tests.
Clock Signal Generation Test
Clock Signal Synchronization Test
To be tested when the PBX is a clock receiver office.
Interoffice Synchronization Test

Clock Signal Generation Test

This test checks to see if the PLO keeps generating clock signals at the frequency of the last source clock,
when the source clock signals from network have stopped. Do the following steps using In Service transmission lines.
STEP1: On all the DTI/PRT/BRT cards mounted in PIM0, set the switches as follows to stop the external
clock signal input.
30DTI/30PRT card: SW-1 and SW-2 to OFF
24DTI/24PRT card: SW0-1 and SW0-2 to OFF
BRT card: SW0-2 and SW0-3 to OFF
2BRT card: SW11-2 and SW11-3 to OFF
4BRT card: SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3 and SW4-4 to OFF
The CLK lamp on the MP card goes out.
STEP2: Originate an outgoing call via trunks.
STEP3: After an outgoing connection via trunks has been established, confirm interoffice synchronization and speech quality as follows:
On the DTMF telephone set, keep pressing any dial button.
Check to see if noise periodically occurs on the DTMF signals coming from the calling station in the opposite office.
Do the above test again in the opposite direction.
STEP4: On all the DTI/PRT/BRT cards mounted in PIM0, restore the switches as the state before testing
to input the external clock signals.
The CLK lamp on the MP card lights.
NOTE:

If noise periodically occurs, replace the MP card after checking the switch settings on the MP
card, and do the above test again.

324

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

Clock Signal Synchronization Test

This test checks to see if the PLO keeps synchronizing with the external clock signals, when the external
clock signals from network have input again after they have stopped once. Do the following steps using
In Service transmission lines.
(1)

When providing one clock supply route

STEP1: On the DTI0/PRT0/BRT0 card extracting clock signals, set the switches as follows to stop the
external clock signal input.
30DTI0/30PRT0 card: SW-1 and SW-2 to OFF
24DTI0/24PRT0 card: SW0-1 and SW0-2 to OFF
BRT0 card: SW0-2 and SW0-3 to OFF
2BRT0 card: SW11-2 and SW11-3 to OFF
4BRT0 card: SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3 and SW4-4 to OFF
The CLK lamp on the MP card goes out.
STEP2: Originate an outgoing call via trunk.
STEP3: After an outgoing connection via trunk has been established, confirm interoffice synchronization and speech quality as follows:
On the DTMF telephone set, keep pressing any dial button.
Check to see if noise periodically occurs on the DTMF signals coming from the calling station in the opposite office.
Do the above test again in the opposite direction.
STEP4: On the DTI0/PRT0/BRT0 card, restore the switches as the state before testing to input the external clock signals.
30DTI0/30PRT0 card: SW-1 to ON, SW-2 to OFF
24DTI0/24PRT0 card: SW0-1 to ON, SW0-2 to OFF
BRT0 card: SW0-2 to ON, SW0-3 to ON
2BRT0 card: SW11-2 to ON, SW11-3 to ON
4BRT0 card: SW4-1 to ON, SW4-2 to OFF, SW4-3 to OFF, SW4-4 to OFF and SW4-5 to ON
The CLK lamp on the MP card lights.
STEP5: Originate an outgoing call via trunks.
STEP6: After an outgoing connection via trunks has been established, confirm interoffice synchronization and speech quality with the procedure shown in STEP 3.
NOTE:

If noise periodically occurs, replace the MP card after checking the switch settings on the MP
card, and do the above test again.

325

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

(2)

When providing two clock supply routes

STEP1: On the DTI/PRT/BRT cards extracting clock signals, set the switches as follows to change the
clock supply route from 0 to 1.
30DTI0/30PRT0 card: SW-1 to OFF, SW-2 to OFF
30DTI1/30PRT1 card: SW-1 to OFF, SW-2 to ON
24DTI0/24PRT0 card: SW0-1 to OFF, SW0-2 to OFF
24DTI1/24PRT1 card: SW0-1 to OFF, SW0-2 to ON
BRT0 card: SW0-2 to OFF, SW0-3 to OFF
BRT1 card: SW0-2 to ON, SW0-3 to OFF
2BRT0 card: SW11-2 to OFF, SW11-3 to OFF
2BRT1 card: SW11-2 to ON, SW11-3 to OFF
4BRT0 card: SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3, SW4-4 and SW4-5 to OFF
4BRT1 card: SW4-1 to ON, SW4-2 to OFF, SW4-3 to OFF, SW4-4 to OFF and SW4-5 to
OFF
STEP2: Originate an outgoing call via trunks.
STEP3: After an outgoing connection via trunks has been established, confirm interoffice synchronization and speech quality as follows:
On the DTMF telephone set, keep pressing any dial button.
Check to see if noise periodically occurs on the DTMF signals coming from the calling station in the opposite office.
Do the above test again in the opposite direction.
STEP4: On the DTI/PRT/BRT cards, set the switches as follows to stop the external clock signal input.
30DTI0/1, 30PRT0/1 card: SW-1 and SW-2 to OFF
24DTI0/1, 24PRT0/1 card: SW0-1 and SW0-2 to OFF
BRT0/1 card: SW0-2 and SW0-3 to OFF
2BRT0/1 card: SW11-2 and SW11-3 to OFF
4BRT0/1 card: SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3 and SW4-4 to OFF
The CLK lamp on the MP card goes out.
STEP5: Repeat the procedure shown in STEP 2 and STEP 3.
STEP6: On the DTI0/1, PRT0/1, BRT0/1 cards, set the switches as shown in STEP 1 to input clock signals from the clock supply route 1.
STEP7: Repeat the procedure shown in STEP 2 and STEP 3.

326

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

STEP8: On the DTI/PRT/BRT cards, set the switches as follows to change the clock supply route from
1 to 0.
30DTI0/30PRT0 card: SW-1 to ON, SW-2 to OFF
30DTI1/30PRT1 card: SW-1 to OFF, SW-2 to ON
24DTI0/24PRT0 card: SW0-1 to ON SW0-2 to OFF
24DTI1/24PRT1 card: SW0-1 to OFF, SW0-2 to ON
BRT0 card: SW0-2 to ON, SW0-3 to ON
BRT1 card: SW0-2 to ON, SW0-3 to OFF
2BRT0 card: SW11-2 to ON, SW0-3 to ON
2BRT1 card: SW11-2 to ON, SW0-3 to OFF
4BRT0 card: SW4-1 to ON, SW4-2 to OFF, SW4-3 to OFF, SW4-4 to OFF and SW4-5 to ON
4BRT1 card: SW4-1 to ON, SW4-2 to OFF, SW4-3 to OFF, SW4-4 to OFF and SW4-5 to
OFF
The CLK lamp on the MP card lights.
STEP9: Repeat the procedure shown in STEP 2 and STEP 3.
NOTE:

If noise periodically occurs, replace the MP card after checking the switch settings on the MP
card, and do the above test again.

327

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION TEST

PLO OPERATION TEST

Interoffice Synchronization Test

This test checks to see if noise occurs while calling with the opposite office, by difference of the clock
signal frequency between the offices. Do the following steps using In Service transmission lines.
STEP1: Originate an outgoing call via trunks.
STEP2: Check the speech quality (if noise, distortion or click occurs during a few minutes) with the opposite office mutually.
STEP3: On the DTMF telephone set, keep pressing any dial button, and check to see if noise periodically occurs on the DTMF signals coming from the calling station in the opposite office.
STEP4: Do the above test again in the opposite direction.
NOTE:

If noise periodically occurs, replace the MP card after checking the switch settings on the MP
card, and do the above test again.

328

NWA-008852-001 Rev.5.0
98ch5001.fm